AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum ....

45
AC NO: 20- 14 DATE: 29 July 1911 ADVISORY -~- CIRCULAR AJ;BCB,AfI f9§JIJQN 4liP ANTTCQL 1 jISTQN LJQHT MEA§YBEMENI§ DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION Initiated by: FS-130

Transcript of AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum ....

Page 1: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

AC NO 20- 14

DATE 29 July 1911

bull ADVISORY -~shy

~ CIRCULARbull

AJBCBAfI f9sectJIJQN 4liP ANTTCQL1jISTQN LJQHT MEAsectYBEMENIsect

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION

Initiated by FS-130

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

FOREWORD

1 PURPOSE this advisory circular contains useful information concerning mea1urementa for intensity covering and color of aircraft position and anticollision lights

2 REFERENCES Federal Aviation Regulations FAR 231385 through 231397 and 231401 FAR 251385 through 251397 and 251401 FAR 271385 through271397 and 271401 FAR 291385 through 291397 and 291401 Advisory Circular AC 20-30A

3 BAQCGROUND

a this advisory circular has been developed as a reference for those concerned with data on measurements of aircraft position and antibull collision lights Light measurement is quite complex and users of this advisory circular will have various degrees of experience and training Por these reasons chapter one contains educational and reference material on the properties of light It includes a description of light and discusses the general parameters bull

b Chapter two includes information qn types of measurementsmiddotand descriptions of the equipment used to make them

c Chapter three ia devoted to discussions on measurement data First the Federal Aviation Regulations are shown by pictorial representamiddot tions Following this measurement data considerations are given including the precautions which should be observed when making measurements

d The appendices include a 1101sag of terms a conversion table a biblioaraphy and a discussion of tristimulus colorimetry as applied to aircraft position and anticollision ligtt measurements

Service

middot 29 July 1971

TABLE OF CONlENTS

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

LIST OF TABLES

CHAPTlt 1 PROPERTIES OF LIGHT

1 General 2 Intensity 3 Color

CIIAPTEB 2 MEASUlNENl CONSIDBIATIONS

4 General 5 Inte-sity 6 P0lor

~

7 Teuaperature Effectbull

8 General 9 Position Light Data

10 Anticolllslon Liaht Data

APPENDIX 1 GLOSSARY OF TERMS

APPENDIX 2 bull PBOTCJmTlUC TERMS

APPENDIX 3 TllISTIMtJLUS COLORIMBlRY AND AVIATION LIGHTS

APPENDIX 4 BIBLIOGIAPBY

AC 20middot 74

Page

iii

V

l

2 2 6

13

13 13 16 19

21

21 21 24

(2 pages) l

(1 page) l

(2 pages) l

(2 pages) 1

29 July 1971 AC 20- 74

LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS

Illamp

The Visible Spectrum

StandardbullObserver Lum1iaou1bullEfficiency Curve (CIE)

Intensity and Illumination

Spectral Tri1timulua Valuebull According to the 1931 CIE Standard Obaerver

CIBbull ChrotMticity Diagram

Strip Recording of Pla1h

PoaitionLigbts Minimamppa tnten11ty in the Horisontal Plane

Position Lights Minimum lntensities in Vertical Planebull

Anticolliaion Lightbull Minimum tntenaity in Vertical Plane

Typical Borisontal Calldlepower DistributionbullPoaition Light

Typical Vertical canctlepowr DistributionbullPoaition Light

Vertical Distribution of Rotating Beacon

Time vs Intenaity curvea o0 ancl s0

for Rotating Beacon

Time va Intenaity bull 2Q0

for Rotating Beacon

Typical Plashtube Measurement Data Sheet

rICURE

11

12

13

14

15

21

31

32

33

34

35

36

3 7

38

3 9

PAGE-1

3

5

7

10

15

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

Page iii(and iv)

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

LIST OF TABLES

PACE ~

4Spectral Luminous Efficiency V(A) 11

8

Computation Form 21 17

Spectral Tristimulus Values 12

Page v (and vi)

bullbullbullbull

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTEI 1

PllOPEBIIESOF LIGHT

1 GENDAL Light is visually evaluated radiant energybull Like other forms of radiant energy light travels through space at a constant velocity of 3000001 000 meters per second Light energy may be considered as having a sinusoidal wave form stimulating vision only over a narrow band of wavelengths (Fig 11) Within this band the amplitude affects the vuual sensation of brightneS8 and the wavelength the visual sensation of hue The longest waves produce a sensation of red and the shortest a sensation of violet By definition white occurs when all visible wavelengths are combined in equal amounts The appearance of white however may be produced when certain critical ones are combined If the light covers a narrow band of wavelengths a certain hue is seen Black is usually treated as the absence of sti111Ulation The wavelength of light may be expressed in micrometers (~m) equal to 10-6 meters in nanometers (am) equal to 10-9 meters or in angstroms on equal to 10-10 bulltera middot

WAVELENGTH IN METERS 10-1 104 10bull

ltampOIO WAVII bullttRampbullltlD bull-cbullbullobullbull CIRCUITS

I I I I

I I

I I VISIBLE SPECTRUM

I

700

I lt

HN YlampLOW OltampNamp I II

400 500 100 bull WAVELENGTH IN NANOMETERS

111VISIBLE SPECTRUM

igure 11

t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln

t----4--f-__J--___J-_--4

Chap l Page 1Par 1

29 July 1971AC 20bull 74

The sensitivity of the eye bovever varies withia this visible spectrum Radiant energy atdiffereut wavelengths produces varying sensations of brightness even though the amount of energy received is the same at each wavelength Figure 12 and Table 11 shaw that the eye is twice as sensitive to a yellow-green of 555 nanometers as it is to a green of 510 nm This cur-e is referred to u spectral sensitivity of the human eye or luminous efficiency When the intensity of colored lights is measured this variable sensitivity of the eye must be taken into consideration In other words a red light IILISt be auch higher in power to appear equally as bright as a green light The detecting device therefore 1111st be corrected for the response of the staadard observer if the reading is to indicate luminous (visual) output middot The numbers associatedwith Figure 12 and Table 11 are referred to as spectral luminous efficiencies It should be remembered that lumens and candelas are associated with visible light and as the sensitivity of the eye decreases so does the amount of lumens for the same radiant pover This is evidenced in the conversion from watts to lwaens luminous flux in lumens bull 680 V()) times the radiant flux inwatts

2 INTENSITY The luminous flux being emitted from a point source if the light is middotemitted equally in all directions may be represented by a sphere Light flux is rate of flow of visible energy The basic unit of flux is the lumen which by definition is equal to l4w times the total flux emitted by a uniform point source of one candela The flux emitted by a point source per unit solid angle (steradian) is called intensity A steradian is defined as that solid angle originating at the center of a sphere and subtending an area on the sphere surface equal to the square of the sphere radius Intensity is measured 1a lumens per steradian and a uniform point source equal to one candela has an intensity in every direction of one lumen per steradian Intensity in a given direction is usually expressed in candelas and is often called candlepower

The luminous flux density received on a surface (illuminance) varies with the intensity of the source and inversely as the square of the distance from the source to the surface Illuminance is expressed in lumens per unit area or footcandles Figure 13 shows that as the distance from a source increases one lumen is spread over increasing areas and the illuminance decreases The relation of illuminance to distance from the source is referred to as the inverse square law The illuminance from a given source varies inversely as the square of the distance from that source Doubling the distance causes the illuminance to decrease to one fourth As measurements of a light source are usually done with instruments which measure illuminance the distance aist be known before the intensity of the source can be determined In other words footcandles times the distance squared gives candelas For example if a footcandle reading of 10 is measured at 10 feet from the source the intensity is 1000 candelas

Chap 1 Par 1 Page 2

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

(-shy gt bull

gtshyu 2 LIJ-u Iamp- 06 Iamp LIJ u 0 z 2 - 04 _ _ ct a t-u LLI G Cl)

Chap 1 Par 2

o

09

08

01

05

VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I

r I

1

I I

REO

03

02

Ot

J

I I

V L shy0

380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740

WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS

STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)

Figure 12

Page 3

AC 20- 74 29 July 1971

1931 CI STANlgtAlU) OBSPBVEB

WAVELENGTH NANOMETEIS

380

390

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

470

480

490

500

510

S20

S30

540

sso

560

570

Page 4

SPECTllAL LUMINOUS WAVEIBllnB EFFICIENCY V(l) IWICltBTDS

00000 S80

00001 590

00004 600

00012 610

00040 620

01116 630

00230 640

00380 650 00600 660

00910 670

01390 680

02080 690

03230 700

OS030 710

07100 720

08620 730

09540 740

099SO 7SO

099S0 760

09520 770

SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCYbull

Table 11

SPBCTllAL LUMINOUS ElPICIENCY V ())

08700

07570

06310

OS030

03810

02650

01750

01070

00610

00320

00170

00082

00041

00021

00010

oooos

00003

00001

00001

00000

V00

Chap 1 Pu 2

29 July 1971 AC 20- 74

----INTENSITY bullI CANDELA= I LUMENSTERADlff

~t----------lMETER ________ _____ IFT ___

I CM

AREA=ICM 1

ILLUMINANCEbull I LUMENCM 1

AREAt Fll ILLUMINANCE I LUMENFT 1

AREA= I METERt ILLUMINANCE a f LUMENM1

INTBNSITY AND ILLUMDIATION

Figure 13

Fluhing lightbull are u1ed exten1ively a1 1ignals and warnings because of their superiority ira attractuag attention Becauae of thia characteristic flashing beacoae were eatabliahed bullbull the required lighting for anticollision light8 These beacona are of Hveral types rotating flashing incandesshycent oscillating and gu discharge (strobe)

When a light aignal cOQlists of separate flashes cile maximum intensity during the flash must be greater than the inteueity of a steady light to have the sam apparent inteneity It is convenient to evaluate flashing light1 in terms of their EFFECTIVE INTENSITY I 8 or EFI the intensity of a eteady light which will appear equally bright when viewed at threshold and is expressed in candelas

Chap 1 Par 2 Page 5

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Current airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights specify the following equation (known as the Blondel Rey equation) for the computation of effective inteueity

where lebull effective intensity

I(t) bull instantaneous intensity as a function of time

t2 - tibull flash time interval (seconds)

The maximum computed value ofbull-effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at tz and t1 For short time flashes t2 shy t 1becomes insignificant compared to 02 seconds and the total flash is intearated

Short-duration flashtube lights have been used primarily as suppleshymentary lights Since flashtubes in general produce relatively small proportions of red light about 90 percent of the light is lost in passing it through a red filter Therefore in order to use this source for an anti-collision light it is necessary to operate them at higher energy levels than has been comDOn in the small supplementary lights

3 COLOR The sensation of color is closely related to the wavelength of light and varies with the individual and the conditions of viewing Usually a color is said to have three psychological c0111ponents (red blue orange etc) brightness and saturation (the amount a color differs from a grey of the same brightness) A measure of hue sufficiently reliable for signal-color specification is the wavelength of the part of the spectrum required to be mixed with the equal-energy(white) source to produce the color this wavelength is called the dominant wavelength of the color -Saturation ia satisfactorily specified by the ratio of the distance on the CIE chromaticity diagram (See Figure lS) from the equal-energy point to the color point to the distance from equal-energy point in the same direction to the spectrum locus This ratio is called purity

Chap l Par 3Page 6

29 July 1971 AC 20bull74

It can be shown that any color can be matched by combining three properly choeea colors called pr111111ry colors If a colored sample is placed in OGe half of a photo11etric field a mixture ~f three primary colors such as red green and bbe in the other half of the field can be made to match the colored sample to the satisfaction of the eye This is done by varying the relative brightness of the three pdury colors A problem with this method is that the matching judgment of one obaerver cannot be taken as representative of the average person Only when a large number of observers are used in each experibullnt can consistent values be obtained for the relative brightne88 of primary colors required to match any given color In order to avoid this difficulty the tristimulus method was revised and standardiHd ftlree primary colors were agreed upon thea by expertbullnta with a number of normal observers standard values for the relative amounts of each primary color were established to match each wavelength in the visible spectrum These numbers were associated witha standard observer With these values made available in 1931 by the COllliaaion Internationale de LEclairage (CIE) a more objective and ecoaomcal teclmicie is available to specify color Figure 14 is a graphical presentation of the relative amounts of each primary color required to bulltch any wavelength Standard notation for these functions is i for the red primary y for the green primary and z for the blue primary It should be noted that the f function has been adjusted to correspond to the luminous-efficiency function Figure 12) Table 12 shows the values of these functions in tabular form

eoo eoo ~nm

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES ACCORDING TO THE 1931 CIE STANDARD OBSERVER

Figure 14

Chap l Page 7 Par 3

bullbull bullbull

TAe 1951 CIE _taatlanl olgtaerver Spectral trl1tlmulua TalUH of MUAlbulltDUff IPfftral trtt1mulu1 nlu11 or equal-entrn NWabulltmiddot 1peetrum 1peetrumwu1learth 0bull- T -bull 7 ~ bull bull

IH 00000180 ooou oooa 180 OtlO 08100 0001100010022 1811 t1H 811130101 000100t2 020 1110 TITO0002OOT8 OH uIll 331amp oootoo 0143 0819 800 10821 8110tOI 00000232 tOI totlllmiddot1102 13ee gtlO 0435 0012 bull 01 I 8010 000tH one 0022 111 o 38t ta1~ 0002t20 Utt OOtO ll middotUrMIi bullbull 10 0002421 tu8 0011 10191 TIH 1210 00012839 out l1858 eao410 HH 2810 0000t I 1285 0118 11210 Ill Hit 2110 0000Ital 0210 UtTl MOtJO tt1t 1110t I Hat 02111 1182 HI 1908 II 2 bull 0

no 1382 0180 U121 1 middot=middot0000middotA101187411 Ot80 Uttl middot1l 811 te 0000teO lt08 oeoo 1880 fl8 Utt 0810 0000t81 2511 0739 10281 tel 1212 OU8t10 ltllt 0810 12878 t10 OITt 0320 =tTI H21 1128 1ot19 eta 0281 0000oea3tlO 091UI 1390 08110 eao OITO 00003etH 01180 1893 81 2 8H 121 0111tlO 2080 4812g120 810 0221 008tH bull UT 2588 aaaa 811 0118 0011 II100 OOtl 1230 2120 TOO out oou 0000IOIJ 002 t073 TOG2121 0029 00003311IUO 0093 1030 108 TIO 158 00003321118 8082 1117 TH0201 OOtl ll 00001120 083 1100 OTII TIO 0021 0010 0000

1098 T93202g OIT8 1211 0020 0007Hllll 8820 Ot22 180 OOH 0005 smIla 2257 9H9 0288 TH 0010 OOOt 0000HO 29ot 911t0 0208 TtO 0007 0003HI 1111 8803 out Tt5 0001 0002 =HO 43U 1910 0081 TIIO 0003 0001 0000HI 11121 10002 00111 TOIi 0002 0001 00001180 Htl OHIO 0039 T80 0002 0001 00007H 0027g78e 1811 0001 0000 0000Hamp 1121 120 0021 170 0001 0000 0000 HH11g gu5 TTIgg1e 0000 0000Ill bull 103 8100 bull 1T TSO 0000 0000 = -shy- shyTotal _____

211713 2l17lt 21ITU

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES

Table 12

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Capital lettere x Y aad Z have bean ubulliped u ootatioa formiddotthe aaouate of tbe three pribullriea required to viaually utch a color containing multiple wavelengthbull Thue valuea can be plotted ~raphically if the following traneformationa are made

x bull X (2) y y (3) z z (4) X+1+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

where X Y and z are the amounts of the three primaries ana x y and z are the chrobullticity coordinates in the CU system The horizontal of the graph becomes x and the vertical becomes y z may be obtained from the relationship x + y + z bull 1 Such a graph shown in Figure 1S 18 called a chromaticity diagram Any color may be located 011 the diagram by specifying its chromaticity coordinates The colors used middotfor lighting of aircraft are shown with the limits ae established by the airworthiness regulations On this diagram there is a central white point marked 1where X bull Y bull Z correapondi111 to the color of a source having an equalshyeDergy spectrum All x + y + z bull 1 this white point appears graphically at x bull 33t y bull 333 and represents a position of zero purity The outer periphery of this diagram is a locus of points of 100 purity for visible wavelengths A line draw from any point on tbi8 periphery to the point of equal energy (I) represents all purities between 100 and O for that domlnant wavelengt~ For exa111ple a line is ahawn for a light of dominant wavelength o aicrobullters with the 0 50 and 100 purity points indicated An aviation green light of this dominant wavelength would have to have a purity of only 32 to bullet the regulatory requirements Aviation red however would require a purity of nearly 100

The te111perature scale along the bottom of the diagram showiDg a range from 1000 K to infinity contains calibrations for source color te111peratures Note tbat each cemperature has a calibration bullrk 011

the curved line above The curved line is called the Planckian locus and represents the chrobullticitiea of blackbodies at different teaperaturea In practical applicationa it is accepted as representing the chromaticities of incandescent bodiea 1Ncb u lamp filaments The numbers along thia curve 011 the CU diagramp11 indicate the color temperature in Kelvins Cll illuminant A can be represented on this curve at the 2854 I point illuminant B at about SOOO K and C at about 6800 K llluliinant A represents the spectral distribution of typical tungsten-fihment incandescent lamps iilum~nant B represents- the spectral discributioa of average noon sunlight and illuminant C represents the spectral distribution of average daylight

Chap l Page 9Par l 41bullU O bull ti bullI

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 2: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

FOREWORD

1 PURPOSE this advisory circular contains useful information concerning mea1urementa for intensity covering and color of aircraft position and anticollision lights

2 REFERENCES Federal Aviation Regulations FAR 231385 through 231397 and 231401 FAR 251385 through 251397 and 251401 FAR 271385 through271397 and 271401 FAR 291385 through 291397 and 291401 Advisory Circular AC 20-30A

3 BAQCGROUND

a this advisory circular has been developed as a reference for those concerned with data on measurements of aircraft position and antibull collision lights Light measurement is quite complex and users of this advisory circular will have various degrees of experience and training Por these reasons chapter one contains educational and reference material on the properties of light It includes a description of light and discusses the general parameters bull

b Chapter two includes information qn types of measurementsmiddotand descriptions of the equipment used to make them

c Chapter three ia devoted to discussions on measurement data First the Federal Aviation Regulations are shown by pictorial representamiddot tions Following this measurement data considerations are given including the precautions which should be observed when making measurements

d The appendices include a 1101sag of terms a conversion table a biblioaraphy and a discussion of tristimulus colorimetry as applied to aircraft position and anticollision ligtt measurements

Service

middot 29 July 1971

TABLE OF CONlENTS

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

LIST OF TABLES

CHAPTlt 1 PROPERTIES OF LIGHT

1 General 2 Intensity 3 Color

CIIAPTEB 2 MEASUlNENl CONSIDBIATIONS

4 General 5 Inte-sity 6 P0lor

~

7 Teuaperature Effectbull

8 General 9 Position Light Data

10 Anticolllslon Liaht Data

APPENDIX 1 GLOSSARY OF TERMS

APPENDIX 2 bull PBOTCJmTlUC TERMS

APPENDIX 3 TllISTIMtJLUS COLORIMBlRY AND AVIATION LIGHTS

APPENDIX 4 BIBLIOGIAPBY

AC 20middot 74

Page

iii

V

l

2 2 6

13

13 13 16 19

21

21 21 24

(2 pages) l

(1 page) l

(2 pages) l

(2 pages) 1

29 July 1971 AC 20- 74

LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS

Illamp

The Visible Spectrum

StandardbullObserver Lum1iaou1bullEfficiency Curve (CIE)

Intensity and Illumination

Spectral Tri1timulua Valuebull According to the 1931 CIE Standard Obaerver

CIBbull ChrotMticity Diagram

Strip Recording of Pla1h

PoaitionLigbts Minimamppa tnten11ty in the Horisontal Plane

Position Lights Minimum lntensities in Vertical Planebull

Anticolliaion Lightbull Minimum tntenaity in Vertical Plane

Typical Borisontal Calldlepower DistributionbullPoaition Light

Typical Vertical canctlepowr DistributionbullPoaition Light

Vertical Distribution of Rotating Beacon

Time vs Intenaity curvea o0 ancl s0

for Rotating Beacon

Time va Intenaity bull 2Q0

for Rotating Beacon

Typical Plashtube Measurement Data Sheet

rICURE

11

12

13

14

15

21

31

32

33

34

35

36

3 7

38

3 9

PAGE-1

3

5

7

10

15

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

Page iii(and iv)

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

LIST OF TABLES

PACE ~

4Spectral Luminous Efficiency V(A) 11

8

Computation Form 21 17

Spectral Tristimulus Values 12

Page v (and vi)

bullbullbullbull

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTEI 1

PllOPEBIIESOF LIGHT

1 GENDAL Light is visually evaluated radiant energybull Like other forms of radiant energy light travels through space at a constant velocity of 3000001 000 meters per second Light energy may be considered as having a sinusoidal wave form stimulating vision only over a narrow band of wavelengths (Fig 11) Within this band the amplitude affects the vuual sensation of brightneS8 and the wavelength the visual sensation of hue The longest waves produce a sensation of red and the shortest a sensation of violet By definition white occurs when all visible wavelengths are combined in equal amounts The appearance of white however may be produced when certain critical ones are combined If the light covers a narrow band of wavelengths a certain hue is seen Black is usually treated as the absence of sti111Ulation The wavelength of light may be expressed in micrometers (~m) equal to 10-6 meters in nanometers (am) equal to 10-9 meters or in angstroms on equal to 10-10 bulltera middot

WAVELENGTH IN METERS 10-1 104 10bull

ltampOIO WAVII bullttRampbullltlD bull-cbullbullobullbull CIRCUITS

I I I I

I I

I I VISIBLE SPECTRUM

I

700

I lt

HN YlampLOW OltampNamp I II

400 500 100 bull WAVELENGTH IN NANOMETERS

111VISIBLE SPECTRUM

igure 11

t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln

t----4--f-__J--___J-_--4

Chap l Page 1Par 1

29 July 1971AC 20bull 74

The sensitivity of the eye bovever varies withia this visible spectrum Radiant energy atdiffereut wavelengths produces varying sensations of brightness even though the amount of energy received is the same at each wavelength Figure 12 and Table 11 shaw that the eye is twice as sensitive to a yellow-green of 555 nanometers as it is to a green of 510 nm This cur-e is referred to u spectral sensitivity of the human eye or luminous efficiency When the intensity of colored lights is measured this variable sensitivity of the eye must be taken into consideration In other words a red light IILISt be auch higher in power to appear equally as bright as a green light The detecting device therefore 1111st be corrected for the response of the staadard observer if the reading is to indicate luminous (visual) output middot The numbers associatedwith Figure 12 and Table 11 are referred to as spectral luminous efficiencies It should be remembered that lumens and candelas are associated with visible light and as the sensitivity of the eye decreases so does the amount of lumens for the same radiant pover This is evidenced in the conversion from watts to lwaens luminous flux in lumens bull 680 V()) times the radiant flux inwatts

2 INTENSITY The luminous flux being emitted from a point source if the light is middotemitted equally in all directions may be represented by a sphere Light flux is rate of flow of visible energy The basic unit of flux is the lumen which by definition is equal to l4w times the total flux emitted by a uniform point source of one candela The flux emitted by a point source per unit solid angle (steradian) is called intensity A steradian is defined as that solid angle originating at the center of a sphere and subtending an area on the sphere surface equal to the square of the sphere radius Intensity is measured 1a lumens per steradian and a uniform point source equal to one candela has an intensity in every direction of one lumen per steradian Intensity in a given direction is usually expressed in candelas and is often called candlepower

The luminous flux density received on a surface (illuminance) varies with the intensity of the source and inversely as the square of the distance from the source to the surface Illuminance is expressed in lumens per unit area or footcandles Figure 13 shows that as the distance from a source increases one lumen is spread over increasing areas and the illuminance decreases The relation of illuminance to distance from the source is referred to as the inverse square law The illuminance from a given source varies inversely as the square of the distance from that source Doubling the distance causes the illuminance to decrease to one fourth As measurements of a light source are usually done with instruments which measure illuminance the distance aist be known before the intensity of the source can be determined In other words footcandles times the distance squared gives candelas For example if a footcandle reading of 10 is measured at 10 feet from the source the intensity is 1000 candelas

Chap 1 Par 1 Page 2

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

(-shy gt bull

gtshyu 2 LIJ-u Iamp- 06 Iamp LIJ u 0 z 2 - 04 _ _ ct a t-u LLI G Cl)

Chap 1 Par 2

o

09

08

01

05

VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I

r I

1

I I

REO

03

02

Ot

J

I I

V L shy0

380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740

WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS

STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)

Figure 12

Page 3

AC 20- 74 29 July 1971

1931 CI STANlgtAlU) OBSPBVEB

WAVELENGTH NANOMETEIS

380

390

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

470

480

490

500

510

S20

S30

540

sso

560

570

Page 4

SPECTllAL LUMINOUS WAVEIBllnB EFFICIENCY V(l) IWICltBTDS

00000 S80

00001 590

00004 600

00012 610

00040 620

01116 630

00230 640

00380 650 00600 660

00910 670

01390 680

02080 690

03230 700

OS030 710

07100 720

08620 730

09540 740

099SO 7SO

099S0 760

09520 770

SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCYbull

Table 11

SPBCTllAL LUMINOUS ElPICIENCY V ())

08700

07570

06310

OS030

03810

02650

01750

01070

00610

00320

00170

00082

00041

00021

00010

oooos

00003

00001

00001

00000

V00

Chap 1 Pu 2

29 July 1971 AC 20- 74

----INTENSITY bullI CANDELA= I LUMENSTERADlff

~t----------lMETER ________ _____ IFT ___

I CM

AREA=ICM 1

ILLUMINANCEbull I LUMENCM 1

AREAt Fll ILLUMINANCE I LUMENFT 1

AREA= I METERt ILLUMINANCE a f LUMENM1

INTBNSITY AND ILLUMDIATION

Figure 13

Fluhing lightbull are u1ed exten1ively a1 1ignals and warnings because of their superiority ira attractuag attention Becauae of thia characteristic flashing beacoae were eatabliahed bullbull the required lighting for anticollision light8 These beacona are of Hveral types rotating flashing incandesshycent oscillating and gu discharge (strobe)

When a light aignal cOQlists of separate flashes cile maximum intensity during the flash must be greater than the inteueity of a steady light to have the sam apparent inteneity It is convenient to evaluate flashing light1 in terms of their EFFECTIVE INTENSITY I 8 or EFI the intensity of a eteady light which will appear equally bright when viewed at threshold and is expressed in candelas

Chap 1 Par 2 Page 5

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Current airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights specify the following equation (known as the Blondel Rey equation) for the computation of effective inteueity

where lebull effective intensity

I(t) bull instantaneous intensity as a function of time

t2 - tibull flash time interval (seconds)

The maximum computed value ofbull-effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at tz and t1 For short time flashes t2 shy t 1becomes insignificant compared to 02 seconds and the total flash is intearated

Short-duration flashtube lights have been used primarily as suppleshymentary lights Since flashtubes in general produce relatively small proportions of red light about 90 percent of the light is lost in passing it through a red filter Therefore in order to use this source for an anti-collision light it is necessary to operate them at higher energy levels than has been comDOn in the small supplementary lights

3 COLOR The sensation of color is closely related to the wavelength of light and varies with the individual and the conditions of viewing Usually a color is said to have three psychological c0111ponents (red blue orange etc) brightness and saturation (the amount a color differs from a grey of the same brightness) A measure of hue sufficiently reliable for signal-color specification is the wavelength of the part of the spectrum required to be mixed with the equal-energy(white) source to produce the color this wavelength is called the dominant wavelength of the color -Saturation ia satisfactorily specified by the ratio of the distance on the CIE chromaticity diagram (See Figure lS) from the equal-energy point to the color point to the distance from equal-energy point in the same direction to the spectrum locus This ratio is called purity

Chap l Par 3Page 6

29 July 1971 AC 20bull74

It can be shown that any color can be matched by combining three properly choeea colors called pr111111ry colors If a colored sample is placed in OGe half of a photo11etric field a mixture ~f three primary colors such as red green and bbe in the other half of the field can be made to match the colored sample to the satisfaction of the eye This is done by varying the relative brightness of the three pdury colors A problem with this method is that the matching judgment of one obaerver cannot be taken as representative of the average person Only when a large number of observers are used in each experibullnt can consistent values be obtained for the relative brightne88 of primary colors required to match any given color In order to avoid this difficulty the tristimulus method was revised and standardiHd ftlree primary colors were agreed upon thea by expertbullnta with a number of normal observers standard values for the relative amounts of each primary color were established to match each wavelength in the visible spectrum These numbers were associated witha standard observer With these values made available in 1931 by the COllliaaion Internationale de LEclairage (CIE) a more objective and ecoaomcal teclmicie is available to specify color Figure 14 is a graphical presentation of the relative amounts of each primary color required to bulltch any wavelength Standard notation for these functions is i for the red primary y for the green primary and z for the blue primary It should be noted that the f function has been adjusted to correspond to the luminous-efficiency function Figure 12) Table 12 shows the values of these functions in tabular form

eoo eoo ~nm

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES ACCORDING TO THE 1931 CIE STANDARD OBSERVER

Figure 14

Chap l Page 7 Par 3

bullbull bullbull

TAe 1951 CIE _taatlanl olgtaerver Spectral trl1tlmulua TalUH of MUAlbulltDUff IPfftral trtt1mulu1 nlu11 or equal-entrn NWabulltmiddot 1peetrum 1peetrumwu1learth 0bull- T -bull 7 ~ bull bull

IH 00000180 ooou oooa 180 OtlO 08100 0001100010022 1811 t1H 811130101 000100t2 020 1110 TITO0002OOT8 OH uIll 331amp oootoo 0143 0819 800 10821 8110tOI 00000232 tOI totlllmiddot1102 13ee gtlO 0435 0012 bull 01 I 8010 000tH one 0022 111 o 38t ta1~ 0002t20 Utt OOtO ll middotUrMIi bullbull 10 0002421 tu8 0011 10191 TIH 1210 00012839 out l1858 eao410 HH 2810 0000t I 1285 0118 11210 Ill Hit 2110 0000Ital 0210 UtTl MOtJO tt1t 1110t I Hat 02111 1182 HI 1908 II 2 bull 0

no 1382 0180 U121 1 middot=middot0000middotA101187411 Ot80 Uttl middot1l 811 te 0000teO lt08 oeoo 1880 fl8 Utt 0810 0000t81 2511 0739 10281 tel 1212 OU8t10 ltllt 0810 12878 t10 OITt 0320 =tTI H21 1128 1ot19 eta 0281 0000oea3tlO 091UI 1390 08110 eao OITO 00003etH 01180 1893 81 2 8H 121 0111tlO 2080 4812g120 810 0221 008tH bull UT 2588 aaaa 811 0118 0011 II100 OOtl 1230 2120 TOO out oou 0000IOIJ 002 t073 TOG2121 0029 00003311IUO 0093 1030 108 TIO 158 00003321118 8082 1117 TH0201 OOtl ll 00001120 083 1100 OTII TIO 0021 0010 0000

1098 T93202g OIT8 1211 0020 0007Hllll 8820 Ot22 180 OOH 0005 smIla 2257 9H9 0288 TH 0010 OOOt 0000HO 29ot 911t0 0208 TtO 0007 0003HI 1111 8803 out Tt5 0001 0002 =HO 43U 1910 0081 TIIO 0003 0001 0000HI 11121 10002 00111 TOIi 0002 0001 00001180 Htl OHIO 0039 T80 0002 0001 00007H 0027g78e 1811 0001 0000 0000Hamp 1121 120 0021 170 0001 0000 0000 HH11g gu5 TTIgg1e 0000 0000Ill bull 103 8100 bull 1T TSO 0000 0000 = -shy- shyTotal _____

211713 2l17lt 21ITU

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES

Table 12

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Capital lettere x Y aad Z have bean ubulliped u ootatioa formiddotthe aaouate of tbe three pribullriea required to viaually utch a color containing multiple wavelengthbull Thue valuea can be plotted ~raphically if the following traneformationa are made

x bull X (2) y y (3) z z (4) X+1+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

where X Y and z are the amounts of the three primaries ana x y and z are the chrobullticity coordinates in the CU system The horizontal of the graph becomes x and the vertical becomes y z may be obtained from the relationship x + y + z bull 1 Such a graph shown in Figure 1S 18 called a chromaticity diagram Any color may be located 011 the diagram by specifying its chromaticity coordinates The colors used middotfor lighting of aircraft are shown with the limits ae established by the airworthiness regulations On this diagram there is a central white point marked 1where X bull Y bull Z correapondi111 to the color of a source having an equalshyeDergy spectrum All x + y + z bull 1 this white point appears graphically at x bull 33t y bull 333 and represents a position of zero purity The outer periphery of this diagram is a locus of points of 100 purity for visible wavelengths A line draw from any point on tbi8 periphery to the point of equal energy (I) represents all purities between 100 and O for that domlnant wavelengt~ For exa111ple a line is ahawn for a light of dominant wavelength o aicrobullters with the 0 50 and 100 purity points indicated An aviation green light of this dominant wavelength would have to have a purity of only 32 to bullet the regulatory requirements Aviation red however would require a purity of nearly 100

The te111perature scale along the bottom of the diagram showiDg a range from 1000 K to infinity contains calibrations for source color te111peratures Note tbat each cemperature has a calibration bullrk 011

the curved line above The curved line is called the Planckian locus and represents the chrobullticitiea of blackbodies at different teaperaturea In practical applicationa it is accepted as representing the chromaticities of incandescent bodiea 1Ncb u lamp filaments The numbers along thia curve 011 the CU diagramp11 indicate the color temperature in Kelvins Cll illuminant A can be represented on this curve at the 2854 I point illuminant B at about SOOO K and C at about 6800 K llluliinant A represents the spectral distribution of typical tungsten-fihment incandescent lamps iilum~nant B represents- the spectral discributioa of average noon sunlight and illuminant C represents the spectral distribution of average daylight

Chap l Page 9Par l 41bullU O bull ti bullI

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 3: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

middot 29 July 1971

TABLE OF CONlENTS

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

LIST OF TABLES

CHAPTlt 1 PROPERTIES OF LIGHT

1 General 2 Intensity 3 Color

CIIAPTEB 2 MEASUlNENl CONSIDBIATIONS

4 General 5 Inte-sity 6 P0lor

~

7 Teuaperature Effectbull

8 General 9 Position Light Data

10 Anticolllslon Liaht Data

APPENDIX 1 GLOSSARY OF TERMS

APPENDIX 2 bull PBOTCJmTlUC TERMS

APPENDIX 3 TllISTIMtJLUS COLORIMBlRY AND AVIATION LIGHTS

APPENDIX 4 BIBLIOGIAPBY

AC 20middot 74

Page

iii

V

l

2 2 6

13

13 13 16 19

21

21 21 24

(2 pages) l

(1 page) l

(2 pages) l

(2 pages) 1

29 July 1971 AC 20- 74

LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS

Illamp

The Visible Spectrum

StandardbullObserver Lum1iaou1bullEfficiency Curve (CIE)

Intensity and Illumination

Spectral Tri1timulua Valuebull According to the 1931 CIE Standard Obaerver

CIBbull ChrotMticity Diagram

Strip Recording of Pla1h

PoaitionLigbts Minimamppa tnten11ty in the Horisontal Plane

Position Lights Minimum lntensities in Vertical Planebull

Anticolliaion Lightbull Minimum tntenaity in Vertical Plane

Typical Borisontal Calldlepower DistributionbullPoaition Light

Typical Vertical canctlepowr DistributionbullPoaition Light

Vertical Distribution of Rotating Beacon

Time vs Intenaity curvea o0 ancl s0

for Rotating Beacon

Time va Intenaity bull 2Q0

for Rotating Beacon

Typical Plashtube Measurement Data Sheet

rICURE

11

12

13

14

15

21

31

32

33

34

35

36

3 7

38

3 9

PAGE-1

3

5

7

10

15

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

Page iii(and iv)

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

LIST OF TABLES

PACE ~

4Spectral Luminous Efficiency V(A) 11

8

Computation Form 21 17

Spectral Tristimulus Values 12

Page v (and vi)

bullbullbullbull

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTEI 1

PllOPEBIIESOF LIGHT

1 GENDAL Light is visually evaluated radiant energybull Like other forms of radiant energy light travels through space at a constant velocity of 3000001 000 meters per second Light energy may be considered as having a sinusoidal wave form stimulating vision only over a narrow band of wavelengths (Fig 11) Within this band the amplitude affects the vuual sensation of brightneS8 and the wavelength the visual sensation of hue The longest waves produce a sensation of red and the shortest a sensation of violet By definition white occurs when all visible wavelengths are combined in equal amounts The appearance of white however may be produced when certain critical ones are combined If the light covers a narrow band of wavelengths a certain hue is seen Black is usually treated as the absence of sti111Ulation The wavelength of light may be expressed in micrometers (~m) equal to 10-6 meters in nanometers (am) equal to 10-9 meters or in angstroms on equal to 10-10 bulltera middot

WAVELENGTH IN METERS 10-1 104 10bull

ltampOIO WAVII bullttRampbullltlD bull-cbullbullobullbull CIRCUITS

I I I I

I I

I I VISIBLE SPECTRUM

I

700

I lt

HN YlampLOW OltampNamp I II

400 500 100 bull WAVELENGTH IN NANOMETERS

111VISIBLE SPECTRUM

igure 11

t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln

t----4--f-__J--___J-_--4

Chap l Page 1Par 1

29 July 1971AC 20bull 74

The sensitivity of the eye bovever varies withia this visible spectrum Radiant energy atdiffereut wavelengths produces varying sensations of brightness even though the amount of energy received is the same at each wavelength Figure 12 and Table 11 shaw that the eye is twice as sensitive to a yellow-green of 555 nanometers as it is to a green of 510 nm This cur-e is referred to u spectral sensitivity of the human eye or luminous efficiency When the intensity of colored lights is measured this variable sensitivity of the eye must be taken into consideration In other words a red light IILISt be auch higher in power to appear equally as bright as a green light The detecting device therefore 1111st be corrected for the response of the staadard observer if the reading is to indicate luminous (visual) output middot The numbers associatedwith Figure 12 and Table 11 are referred to as spectral luminous efficiencies It should be remembered that lumens and candelas are associated with visible light and as the sensitivity of the eye decreases so does the amount of lumens for the same radiant pover This is evidenced in the conversion from watts to lwaens luminous flux in lumens bull 680 V()) times the radiant flux inwatts

2 INTENSITY The luminous flux being emitted from a point source if the light is middotemitted equally in all directions may be represented by a sphere Light flux is rate of flow of visible energy The basic unit of flux is the lumen which by definition is equal to l4w times the total flux emitted by a uniform point source of one candela The flux emitted by a point source per unit solid angle (steradian) is called intensity A steradian is defined as that solid angle originating at the center of a sphere and subtending an area on the sphere surface equal to the square of the sphere radius Intensity is measured 1a lumens per steradian and a uniform point source equal to one candela has an intensity in every direction of one lumen per steradian Intensity in a given direction is usually expressed in candelas and is often called candlepower

The luminous flux density received on a surface (illuminance) varies with the intensity of the source and inversely as the square of the distance from the source to the surface Illuminance is expressed in lumens per unit area or footcandles Figure 13 shows that as the distance from a source increases one lumen is spread over increasing areas and the illuminance decreases The relation of illuminance to distance from the source is referred to as the inverse square law The illuminance from a given source varies inversely as the square of the distance from that source Doubling the distance causes the illuminance to decrease to one fourth As measurements of a light source are usually done with instruments which measure illuminance the distance aist be known before the intensity of the source can be determined In other words footcandles times the distance squared gives candelas For example if a footcandle reading of 10 is measured at 10 feet from the source the intensity is 1000 candelas

Chap 1 Par 1 Page 2

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

(-shy gt bull

gtshyu 2 LIJ-u Iamp- 06 Iamp LIJ u 0 z 2 - 04 _ _ ct a t-u LLI G Cl)

Chap 1 Par 2

o

09

08

01

05

VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I

r I

1

I I

REO

03

02

Ot

J

I I

V L shy0

380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740

WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS

STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)

Figure 12

Page 3

AC 20- 74 29 July 1971

1931 CI STANlgtAlU) OBSPBVEB

WAVELENGTH NANOMETEIS

380

390

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

470

480

490

500

510

S20

S30

540

sso

560

570

Page 4

SPECTllAL LUMINOUS WAVEIBllnB EFFICIENCY V(l) IWICltBTDS

00000 S80

00001 590

00004 600

00012 610

00040 620

01116 630

00230 640

00380 650 00600 660

00910 670

01390 680

02080 690

03230 700

OS030 710

07100 720

08620 730

09540 740

099SO 7SO

099S0 760

09520 770

SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCYbull

Table 11

SPBCTllAL LUMINOUS ElPICIENCY V ())

08700

07570

06310

OS030

03810

02650

01750

01070

00610

00320

00170

00082

00041

00021

00010

oooos

00003

00001

00001

00000

V00

Chap 1 Pu 2

29 July 1971 AC 20- 74

----INTENSITY bullI CANDELA= I LUMENSTERADlff

~t----------lMETER ________ _____ IFT ___

I CM

AREA=ICM 1

ILLUMINANCEbull I LUMENCM 1

AREAt Fll ILLUMINANCE I LUMENFT 1

AREA= I METERt ILLUMINANCE a f LUMENM1

INTBNSITY AND ILLUMDIATION

Figure 13

Fluhing lightbull are u1ed exten1ively a1 1ignals and warnings because of their superiority ira attractuag attention Becauae of thia characteristic flashing beacoae were eatabliahed bullbull the required lighting for anticollision light8 These beacona are of Hveral types rotating flashing incandesshycent oscillating and gu discharge (strobe)

When a light aignal cOQlists of separate flashes cile maximum intensity during the flash must be greater than the inteueity of a steady light to have the sam apparent inteneity It is convenient to evaluate flashing light1 in terms of their EFFECTIVE INTENSITY I 8 or EFI the intensity of a eteady light which will appear equally bright when viewed at threshold and is expressed in candelas

Chap 1 Par 2 Page 5

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Current airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights specify the following equation (known as the Blondel Rey equation) for the computation of effective inteueity

where lebull effective intensity

I(t) bull instantaneous intensity as a function of time

t2 - tibull flash time interval (seconds)

The maximum computed value ofbull-effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at tz and t1 For short time flashes t2 shy t 1becomes insignificant compared to 02 seconds and the total flash is intearated

Short-duration flashtube lights have been used primarily as suppleshymentary lights Since flashtubes in general produce relatively small proportions of red light about 90 percent of the light is lost in passing it through a red filter Therefore in order to use this source for an anti-collision light it is necessary to operate them at higher energy levels than has been comDOn in the small supplementary lights

3 COLOR The sensation of color is closely related to the wavelength of light and varies with the individual and the conditions of viewing Usually a color is said to have three psychological c0111ponents (red blue orange etc) brightness and saturation (the amount a color differs from a grey of the same brightness) A measure of hue sufficiently reliable for signal-color specification is the wavelength of the part of the spectrum required to be mixed with the equal-energy(white) source to produce the color this wavelength is called the dominant wavelength of the color -Saturation ia satisfactorily specified by the ratio of the distance on the CIE chromaticity diagram (See Figure lS) from the equal-energy point to the color point to the distance from equal-energy point in the same direction to the spectrum locus This ratio is called purity

Chap l Par 3Page 6

29 July 1971 AC 20bull74

It can be shown that any color can be matched by combining three properly choeea colors called pr111111ry colors If a colored sample is placed in OGe half of a photo11etric field a mixture ~f three primary colors such as red green and bbe in the other half of the field can be made to match the colored sample to the satisfaction of the eye This is done by varying the relative brightness of the three pdury colors A problem with this method is that the matching judgment of one obaerver cannot be taken as representative of the average person Only when a large number of observers are used in each experibullnt can consistent values be obtained for the relative brightne88 of primary colors required to match any given color In order to avoid this difficulty the tristimulus method was revised and standardiHd ftlree primary colors were agreed upon thea by expertbullnta with a number of normal observers standard values for the relative amounts of each primary color were established to match each wavelength in the visible spectrum These numbers were associated witha standard observer With these values made available in 1931 by the COllliaaion Internationale de LEclairage (CIE) a more objective and ecoaomcal teclmicie is available to specify color Figure 14 is a graphical presentation of the relative amounts of each primary color required to bulltch any wavelength Standard notation for these functions is i for the red primary y for the green primary and z for the blue primary It should be noted that the f function has been adjusted to correspond to the luminous-efficiency function Figure 12) Table 12 shows the values of these functions in tabular form

eoo eoo ~nm

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES ACCORDING TO THE 1931 CIE STANDARD OBSERVER

Figure 14

Chap l Page 7 Par 3

bullbull bullbull

TAe 1951 CIE _taatlanl olgtaerver Spectral trl1tlmulua TalUH of MUAlbulltDUff IPfftral trtt1mulu1 nlu11 or equal-entrn NWabulltmiddot 1peetrum 1peetrumwu1learth 0bull- T -bull 7 ~ bull bull

IH 00000180 ooou oooa 180 OtlO 08100 0001100010022 1811 t1H 811130101 000100t2 020 1110 TITO0002OOT8 OH uIll 331amp oootoo 0143 0819 800 10821 8110tOI 00000232 tOI totlllmiddot1102 13ee gtlO 0435 0012 bull 01 I 8010 000tH one 0022 111 o 38t ta1~ 0002t20 Utt OOtO ll middotUrMIi bullbull 10 0002421 tu8 0011 10191 TIH 1210 00012839 out l1858 eao410 HH 2810 0000t I 1285 0118 11210 Ill Hit 2110 0000Ital 0210 UtTl MOtJO tt1t 1110t I Hat 02111 1182 HI 1908 II 2 bull 0

no 1382 0180 U121 1 middot=middot0000middotA101187411 Ot80 Uttl middot1l 811 te 0000teO lt08 oeoo 1880 fl8 Utt 0810 0000t81 2511 0739 10281 tel 1212 OU8t10 ltllt 0810 12878 t10 OITt 0320 =tTI H21 1128 1ot19 eta 0281 0000oea3tlO 091UI 1390 08110 eao OITO 00003etH 01180 1893 81 2 8H 121 0111tlO 2080 4812g120 810 0221 008tH bull UT 2588 aaaa 811 0118 0011 II100 OOtl 1230 2120 TOO out oou 0000IOIJ 002 t073 TOG2121 0029 00003311IUO 0093 1030 108 TIO 158 00003321118 8082 1117 TH0201 OOtl ll 00001120 083 1100 OTII TIO 0021 0010 0000

1098 T93202g OIT8 1211 0020 0007Hllll 8820 Ot22 180 OOH 0005 smIla 2257 9H9 0288 TH 0010 OOOt 0000HO 29ot 911t0 0208 TtO 0007 0003HI 1111 8803 out Tt5 0001 0002 =HO 43U 1910 0081 TIIO 0003 0001 0000HI 11121 10002 00111 TOIi 0002 0001 00001180 Htl OHIO 0039 T80 0002 0001 00007H 0027g78e 1811 0001 0000 0000Hamp 1121 120 0021 170 0001 0000 0000 HH11g gu5 TTIgg1e 0000 0000Ill bull 103 8100 bull 1T TSO 0000 0000 = -shy- shyTotal _____

211713 2l17lt 21ITU

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES

Table 12

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Capital lettere x Y aad Z have bean ubulliped u ootatioa formiddotthe aaouate of tbe three pribullriea required to viaually utch a color containing multiple wavelengthbull Thue valuea can be plotted ~raphically if the following traneformationa are made

x bull X (2) y y (3) z z (4) X+1+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

where X Y and z are the amounts of the three primaries ana x y and z are the chrobullticity coordinates in the CU system The horizontal of the graph becomes x and the vertical becomes y z may be obtained from the relationship x + y + z bull 1 Such a graph shown in Figure 1S 18 called a chromaticity diagram Any color may be located 011 the diagram by specifying its chromaticity coordinates The colors used middotfor lighting of aircraft are shown with the limits ae established by the airworthiness regulations On this diagram there is a central white point marked 1where X bull Y bull Z correapondi111 to the color of a source having an equalshyeDergy spectrum All x + y + z bull 1 this white point appears graphically at x bull 33t y bull 333 and represents a position of zero purity The outer periphery of this diagram is a locus of points of 100 purity for visible wavelengths A line draw from any point on tbi8 periphery to the point of equal energy (I) represents all purities between 100 and O for that domlnant wavelengt~ For exa111ple a line is ahawn for a light of dominant wavelength o aicrobullters with the 0 50 and 100 purity points indicated An aviation green light of this dominant wavelength would have to have a purity of only 32 to bullet the regulatory requirements Aviation red however would require a purity of nearly 100

The te111perature scale along the bottom of the diagram showiDg a range from 1000 K to infinity contains calibrations for source color te111peratures Note tbat each cemperature has a calibration bullrk 011

the curved line above The curved line is called the Planckian locus and represents the chrobullticitiea of blackbodies at different teaperaturea In practical applicationa it is accepted as representing the chromaticities of incandescent bodiea 1Ncb u lamp filaments The numbers along thia curve 011 the CU diagramp11 indicate the color temperature in Kelvins Cll illuminant A can be represented on this curve at the 2854 I point illuminant B at about SOOO K and C at about 6800 K llluliinant A represents the spectral distribution of typical tungsten-fihment incandescent lamps iilum~nant B represents- the spectral discributioa of average noon sunlight and illuminant C represents the spectral distribution of average daylight

Chap l Page 9Par l 41bullU O bull ti bullI

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 4: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 20- 74

LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS

Illamp

The Visible Spectrum

StandardbullObserver Lum1iaou1bullEfficiency Curve (CIE)

Intensity and Illumination

Spectral Tri1timulua Valuebull According to the 1931 CIE Standard Obaerver

CIBbull ChrotMticity Diagram

Strip Recording of Pla1h

PoaitionLigbts Minimamppa tnten11ty in the Horisontal Plane

Position Lights Minimum lntensities in Vertical Planebull

Anticolliaion Lightbull Minimum tntenaity in Vertical Plane

Typical Borisontal Calldlepower DistributionbullPoaition Light

Typical Vertical canctlepowr DistributionbullPoaition Light

Vertical Distribution of Rotating Beacon

Time vs Intenaity curvea o0 ancl s0

for Rotating Beacon

Time va Intenaity bull 2Q0

for Rotating Beacon

Typical Plashtube Measurement Data Sheet

rICURE

11

12

13

14

15

21

31

32

33

34

35

36

3 7

38

3 9

PAGE-1

3

5

7

10

15

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

Page iii(and iv)

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

LIST OF TABLES

PACE ~

4Spectral Luminous Efficiency V(A) 11

8

Computation Form 21 17

Spectral Tristimulus Values 12

Page v (and vi)

bullbullbullbull

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTEI 1

PllOPEBIIESOF LIGHT

1 GENDAL Light is visually evaluated radiant energybull Like other forms of radiant energy light travels through space at a constant velocity of 3000001 000 meters per second Light energy may be considered as having a sinusoidal wave form stimulating vision only over a narrow band of wavelengths (Fig 11) Within this band the amplitude affects the vuual sensation of brightneS8 and the wavelength the visual sensation of hue The longest waves produce a sensation of red and the shortest a sensation of violet By definition white occurs when all visible wavelengths are combined in equal amounts The appearance of white however may be produced when certain critical ones are combined If the light covers a narrow band of wavelengths a certain hue is seen Black is usually treated as the absence of sti111Ulation The wavelength of light may be expressed in micrometers (~m) equal to 10-6 meters in nanometers (am) equal to 10-9 meters or in angstroms on equal to 10-10 bulltera middot

WAVELENGTH IN METERS 10-1 104 10bull

ltampOIO WAVII bullttRampbullltlD bull-cbullbullobullbull CIRCUITS

I I I I

I I

I I VISIBLE SPECTRUM

I

700

I lt

HN YlampLOW OltampNamp I II

400 500 100 bull WAVELENGTH IN NANOMETERS

111VISIBLE SPECTRUM

igure 11

t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln

t----4--f-__J--___J-_--4

Chap l Page 1Par 1

29 July 1971AC 20bull 74

The sensitivity of the eye bovever varies withia this visible spectrum Radiant energy atdiffereut wavelengths produces varying sensations of brightness even though the amount of energy received is the same at each wavelength Figure 12 and Table 11 shaw that the eye is twice as sensitive to a yellow-green of 555 nanometers as it is to a green of 510 nm This cur-e is referred to u spectral sensitivity of the human eye or luminous efficiency When the intensity of colored lights is measured this variable sensitivity of the eye must be taken into consideration In other words a red light IILISt be auch higher in power to appear equally as bright as a green light The detecting device therefore 1111st be corrected for the response of the staadard observer if the reading is to indicate luminous (visual) output middot The numbers associatedwith Figure 12 and Table 11 are referred to as spectral luminous efficiencies It should be remembered that lumens and candelas are associated with visible light and as the sensitivity of the eye decreases so does the amount of lumens for the same radiant pover This is evidenced in the conversion from watts to lwaens luminous flux in lumens bull 680 V()) times the radiant flux inwatts

2 INTENSITY The luminous flux being emitted from a point source if the light is middotemitted equally in all directions may be represented by a sphere Light flux is rate of flow of visible energy The basic unit of flux is the lumen which by definition is equal to l4w times the total flux emitted by a uniform point source of one candela The flux emitted by a point source per unit solid angle (steradian) is called intensity A steradian is defined as that solid angle originating at the center of a sphere and subtending an area on the sphere surface equal to the square of the sphere radius Intensity is measured 1a lumens per steradian and a uniform point source equal to one candela has an intensity in every direction of one lumen per steradian Intensity in a given direction is usually expressed in candelas and is often called candlepower

The luminous flux density received on a surface (illuminance) varies with the intensity of the source and inversely as the square of the distance from the source to the surface Illuminance is expressed in lumens per unit area or footcandles Figure 13 shows that as the distance from a source increases one lumen is spread over increasing areas and the illuminance decreases The relation of illuminance to distance from the source is referred to as the inverse square law The illuminance from a given source varies inversely as the square of the distance from that source Doubling the distance causes the illuminance to decrease to one fourth As measurements of a light source are usually done with instruments which measure illuminance the distance aist be known before the intensity of the source can be determined In other words footcandles times the distance squared gives candelas For example if a footcandle reading of 10 is measured at 10 feet from the source the intensity is 1000 candelas

Chap 1 Par 1 Page 2

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

(-shy gt bull

gtshyu 2 LIJ-u Iamp- 06 Iamp LIJ u 0 z 2 - 04 _ _ ct a t-u LLI G Cl)

Chap 1 Par 2

o

09

08

01

05

VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I

r I

1

I I

REO

03

02

Ot

J

I I

V L shy0

380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740

WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS

STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)

Figure 12

Page 3

AC 20- 74 29 July 1971

1931 CI STANlgtAlU) OBSPBVEB

WAVELENGTH NANOMETEIS

380

390

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

470

480

490

500

510

S20

S30

540

sso

560

570

Page 4

SPECTllAL LUMINOUS WAVEIBllnB EFFICIENCY V(l) IWICltBTDS

00000 S80

00001 590

00004 600

00012 610

00040 620

01116 630

00230 640

00380 650 00600 660

00910 670

01390 680

02080 690

03230 700

OS030 710

07100 720

08620 730

09540 740

099SO 7SO

099S0 760

09520 770

SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCYbull

Table 11

SPBCTllAL LUMINOUS ElPICIENCY V ())

08700

07570

06310

OS030

03810

02650

01750

01070

00610

00320

00170

00082

00041

00021

00010

oooos

00003

00001

00001

00000

V00

Chap 1 Pu 2

29 July 1971 AC 20- 74

----INTENSITY bullI CANDELA= I LUMENSTERADlff

~t----------lMETER ________ _____ IFT ___

I CM

AREA=ICM 1

ILLUMINANCEbull I LUMENCM 1

AREAt Fll ILLUMINANCE I LUMENFT 1

AREA= I METERt ILLUMINANCE a f LUMENM1

INTBNSITY AND ILLUMDIATION

Figure 13

Fluhing lightbull are u1ed exten1ively a1 1ignals and warnings because of their superiority ira attractuag attention Becauae of thia characteristic flashing beacoae were eatabliahed bullbull the required lighting for anticollision light8 These beacona are of Hveral types rotating flashing incandesshycent oscillating and gu discharge (strobe)

When a light aignal cOQlists of separate flashes cile maximum intensity during the flash must be greater than the inteueity of a steady light to have the sam apparent inteneity It is convenient to evaluate flashing light1 in terms of their EFFECTIVE INTENSITY I 8 or EFI the intensity of a eteady light which will appear equally bright when viewed at threshold and is expressed in candelas

Chap 1 Par 2 Page 5

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Current airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights specify the following equation (known as the Blondel Rey equation) for the computation of effective inteueity

where lebull effective intensity

I(t) bull instantaneous intensity as a function of time

t2 - tibull flash time interval (seconds)

The maximum computed value ofbull-effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at tz and t1 For short time flashes t2 shy t 1becomes insignificant compared to 02 seconds and the total flash is intearated

Short-duration flashtube lights have been used primarily as suppleshymentary lights Since flashtubes in general produce relatively small proportions of red light about 90 percent of the light is lost in passing it through a red filter Therefore in order to use this source for an anti-collision light it is necessary to operate them at higher energy levels than has been comDOn in the small supplementary lights

3 COLOR The sensation of color is closely related to the wavelength of light and varies with the individual and the conditions of viewing Usually a color is said to have three psychological c0111ponents (red blue orange etc) brightness and saturation (the amount a color differs from a grey of the same brightness) A measure of hue sufficiently reliable for signal-color specification is the wavelength of the part of the spectrum required to be mixed with the equal-energy(white) source to produce the color this wavelength is called the dominant wavelength of the color -Saturation ia satisfactorily specified by the ratio of the distance on the CIE chromaticity diagram (See Figure lS) from the equal-energy point to the color point to the distance from equal-energy point in the same direction to the spectrum locus This ratio is called purity

Chap l Par 3Page 6

29 July 1971 AC 20bull74

It can be shown that any color can be matched by combining three properly choeea colors called pr111111ry colors If a colored sample is placed in OGe half of a photo11etric field a mixture ~f three primary colors such as red green and bbe in the other half of the field can be made to match the colored sample to the satisfaction of the eye This is done by varying the relative brightness of the three pdury colors A problem with this method is that the matching judgment of one obaerver cannot be taken as representative of the average person Only when a large number of observers are used in each experibullnt can consistent values be obtained for the relative brightne88 of primary colors required to match any given color In order to avoid this difficulty the tristimulus method was revised and standardiHd ftlree primary colors were agreed upon thea by expertbullnta with a number of normal observers standard values for the relative amounts of each primary color were established to match each wavelength in the visible spectrum These numbers were associated witha standard observer With these values made available in 1931 by the COllliaaion Internationale de LEclairage (CIE) a more objective and ecoaomcal teclmicie is available to specify color Figure 14 is a graphical presentation of the relative amounts of each primary color required to bulltch any wavelength Standard notation for these functions is i for the red primary y for the green primary and z for the blue primary It should be noted that the f function has been adjusted to correspond to the luminous-efficiency function Figure 12) Table 12 shows the values of these functions in tabular form

eoo eoo ~nm

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES ACCORDING TO THE 1931 CIE STANDARD OBSERVER

Figure 14

Chap l Page 7 Par 3

bullbull bullbull

TAe 1951 CIE _taatlanl olgtaerver Spectral trl1tlmulua TalUH of MUAlbulltDUff IPfftral trtt1mulu1 nlu11 or equal-entrn NWabulltmiddot 1peetrum 1peetrumwu1learth 0bull- T -bull 7 ~ bull bull

IH 00000180 ooou oooa 180 OtlO 08100 0001100010022 1811 t1H 811130101 000100t2 020 1110 TITO0002OOT8 OH uIll 331amp oootoo 0143 0819 800 10821 8110tOI 00000232 tOI totlllmiddot1102 13ee gtlO 0435 0012 bull 01 I 8010 000tH one 0022 111 o 38t ta1~ 0002t20 Utt OOtO ll middotUrMIi bullbull 10 0002421 tu8 0011 10191 TIH 1210 00012839 out l1858 eao410 HH 2810 0000t I 1285 0118 11210 Ill Hit 2110 0000Ital 0210 UtTl MOtJO tt1t 1110t I Hat 02111 1182 HI 1908 II 2 bull 0

no 1382 0180 U121 1 middot=middot0000middotA101187411 Ot80 Uttl middot1l 811 te 0000teO lt08 oeoo 1880 fl8 Utt 0810 0000t81 2511 0739 10281 tel 1212 OU8t10 ltllt 0810 12878 t10 OITt 0320 =tTI H21 1128 1ot19 eta 0281 0000oea3tlO 091UI 1390 08110 eao OITO 00003etH 01180 1893 81 2 8H 121 0111tlO 2080 4812g120 810 0221 008tH bull UT 2588 aaaa 811 0118 0011 II100 OOtl 1230 2120 TOO out oou 0000IOIJ 002 t073 TOG2121 0029 00003311IUO 0093 1030 108 TIO 158 00003321118 8082 1117 TH0201 OOtl ll 00001120 083 1100 OTII TIO 0021 0010 0000

1098 T93202g OIT8 1211 0020 0007Hllll 8820 Ot22 180 OOH 0005 smIla 2257 9H9 0288 TH 0010 OOOt 0000HO 29ot 911t0 0208 TtO 0007 0003HI 1111 8803 out Tt5 0001 0002 =HO 43U 1910 0081 TIIO 0003 0001 0000HI 11121 10002 00111 TOIi 0002 0001 00001180 Htl OHIO 0039 T80 0002 0001 00007H 0027g78e 1811 0001 0000 0000Hamp 1121 120 0021 170 0001 0000 0000 HH11g gu5 TTIgg1e 0000 0000Ill bull 103 8100 bull 1T TSO 0000 0000 = -shy- shyTotal _____

211713 2l17lt 21ITU

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES

Table 12

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Capital lettere x Y aad Z have bean ubulliped u ootatioa formiddotthe aaouate of tbe three pribullriea required to viaually utch a color containing multiple wavelengthbull Thue valuea can be plotted ~raphically if the following traneformationa are made

x bull X (2) y y (3) z z (4) X+1+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

where X Y and z are the amounts of the three primaries ana x y and z are the chrobullticity coordinates in the CU system The horizontal of the graph becomes x and the vertical becomes y z may be obtained from the relationship x + y + z bull 1 Such a graph shown in Figure 1S 18 called a chromaticity diagram Any color may be located 011 the diagram by specifying its chromaticity coordinates The colors used middotfor lighting of aircraft are shown with the limits ae established by the airworthiness regulations On this diagram there is a central white point marked 1where X bull Y bull Z correapondi111 to the color of a source having an equalshyeDergy spectrum All x + y + z bull 1 this white point appears graphically at x bull 33t y bull 333 and represents a position of zero purity The outer periphery of this diagram is a locus of points of 100 purity for visible wavelengths A line draw from any point on tbi8 periphery to the point of equal energy (I) represents all purities between 100 and O for that domlnant wavelengt~ For exa111ple a line is ahawn for a light of dominant wavelength o aicrobullters with the 0 50 and 100 purity points indicated An aviation green light of this dominant wavelength would have to have a purity of only 32 to bullet the regulatory requirements Aviation red however would require a purity of nearly 100

The te111perature scale along the bottom of the diagram showiDg a range from 1000 K to infinity contains calibrations for source color te111peratures Note tbat each cemperature has a calibration bullrk 011

the curved line above The curved line is called the Planckian locus and represents the chrobullticitiea of blackbodies at different teaperaturea In practical applicationa it is accepted as representing the chromaticities of incandescent bodiea 1Ncb u lamp filaments The numbers along thia curve 011 the CU diagramp11 indicate the color temperature in Kelvins Cll illuminant A can be represented on this curve at the 2854 I point illuminant B at about SOOO K and C at about 6800 K llluliinant A represents the spectral distribution of typical tungsten-fihment incandescent lamps iilum~nant B represents- the spectral discributioa of average noon sunlight and illuminant C represents the spectral distribution of average daylight

Chap l Page 9Par l 41bullU O bull ti bullI

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 5: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

LIST OF TABLES

PACE ~

4Spectral Luminous Efficiency V(A) 11

8

Computation Form 21 17

Spectral Tristimulus Values 12

Page v (and vi)

bullbullbullbull

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTEI 1

PllOPEBIIESOF LIGHT

1 GENDAL Light is visually evaluated radiant energybull Like other forms of radiant energy light travels through space at a constant velocity of 3000001 000 meters per second Light energy may be considered as having a sinusoidal wave form stimulating vision only over a narrow band of wavelengths (Fig 11) Within this band the amplitude affects the vuual sensation of brightneS8 and the wavelength the visual sensation of hue The longest waves produce a sensation of red and the shortest a sensation of violet By definition white occurs when all visible wavelengths are combined in equal amounts The appearance of white however may be produced when certain critical ones are combined If the light covers a narrow band of wavelengths a certain hue is seen Black is usually treated as the absence of sti111Ulation The wavelength of light may be expressed in micrometers (~m) equal to 10-6 meters in nanometers (am) equal to 10-9 meters or in angstroms on equal to 10-10 bulltera middot

WAVELENGTH IN METERS 10-1 104 10bull

ltampOIO WAVII bullttRampbullltlD bull-cbullbullobullbull CIRCUITS

I I I I

I I

I I VISIBLE SPECTRUM

I

700

I lt

HN YlampLOW OltampNamp I II

400 500 100 bull WAVELENGTH IN NANOMETERS

111VISIBLE SPECTRUM

igure 11

t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln

t----4--f-__J--___J-_--4

Chap l Page 1Par 1

29 July 1971AC 20bull 74

The sensitivity of the eye bovever varies withia this visible spectrum Radiant energy atdiffereut wavelengths produces varying sensations of brightness even though the amount of energy received is the same at each wavelength Figure 12 and Table 11 shaw that the eye is twice as sensitive to a yellow-green of 555 nanometers as it is to a green of 510 nm This cur-e is referred to u spectral sensitivity of the human eye or luminous efficiency When the intensity of colored lights is measured this variable sensitivity of the eye must be taken into consideration In other words a red light IILISt be auch higher in power to appear equally as bright as a green light The detecting device therefore 1111st be corrected for the response of the staadard observer if the reading is to indicate luminous (visual) output middot The numbers associatedwith Figure 12 and Table 11 are referred to as spectral luminous efficiencies It should be remembered that lumens and candelas are associated with visible light and as the sensitivity of the eye decreases so does the amount of lumens for the same radiant pover This is evidenced in the conversion from watts to lwaens luminous flux in lumens bull 680 V()) times the radiant flux inwatts

2 INTENSITY The luminous flux being emitted from a point source if the light is middotemitted equally in all directions may be represented by a sphere Light flux is rate of flow of visible energy The basic unit of flux is the lumen which by definition is equal to l4w times the total flux emitted by a uniform point source of one candela The flux emitted by a point source per unit solid angle (steradian) is called intensity A steradian is defined as that solid angle originating at the center of a sphere and subtending an area on the sphere surface equal to the square of the sphere radius Intensity is measured 1a lumens per steradian and a uniform point source equal to one candela has an intensity in every direction of one lumen per steradian Intensity in a given direction is usually expressed in candelas and is often called candlepower

The luminous flux density received on a surface (illuminance) varies with the intensity of the source and inversely as the square of the distance from the source to the surface Illuminance is expressed in lumens per unit area or footcandles Figure 13 shows that as the distance from a source increases one lumen is spread over increasing areas and the illuminance decreases The relation of illuminance to distance from the source is referred to as the inverse square law The illuminance from a given source varies inversely as the square of the distance from that source Doubling the distance causes the illuminance to decrease to one fourth As measurements of a light source are usually done with instruments which measure illuminance the distance aist be known before the intensity of the source can be determined In other words footcandles times the distance squared gives candelas For example if a footcandle reading of 10 is measured at 10 feet from the source the intensity is 1000 candelas

Chap 1 Par 1 Page 2

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

(-shy gt bull

gtshyu 2 LIJ-u Iamp- 06 Iamp LIJ u 0 z 2 - 04 _ _ ct a t-u LLI G Cl)

Chap 1 Par 2

o

09

08

01

05

VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I

r I

1

I I

REO

03

02

Ot

J

I I

V L shy0

380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740

WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS

STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)

Figure 12

Page 3

AC 20- 74 29 July 1971

1931 CI STANlgtAlU) OBSPBVEB

WAVELENGTH NANOMETEIS

380

390

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

470

480

490

500

510

S20

S30

540

sso

560

570

Page 4

SPECTllAL LUMINOUS WAVEIBllnB EFFICIENCY V(l) IWICltBTDS

00000 S80

00001 590

00004 600

00012 610

00040 620

01116 630

00230 640

00380 650 00600 660

00910 670

01390 680

02080 690

03230 700

OS030 710

07100 720

08620 730

09540 740

099SO 7SO

099S0 760

09520 770

SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCYbull

Table 11

SPBCTllAL LUMINOUS ElPICIENCY V ())

08700

07570

06310

OS030

03810

02650

01750

01070

00610

00320

00170

00082

00041

00021

00010

oooos

00003

00001

00001

00000

V00

Chap 1 Pu 2

29 July 1971 AC 20- 74

----INTENSITY bullI CANDELA= I LUMENSTERADlff

~t----------lMETER ________ _____ IFT ___

I CM

AREA=ICM 1

ILLUMINANCEbull I LUMENCM 1

AREAt Fll ILLUMINANCE I LUMENFT 1

AREA= I METERt ILLUMINANCE a f LUMENM1

INTBNSITY AND ILLUMDIATION

Figure 13

Fluhing lightbull are u1ed exten1ively a1 1ignals and warnings because of their superiority ira attractuag attention Becauae of thia characteristic flashing beacoae were eatabliahed bullbull the required lighting for anticollision light8 These beacona are of Hveral types rotating flashing incandesshycent oscillating and gu discharge (strobe)

When a light aignal cOQlists of separate flashes cile maximum intensity during the flash must be greater than the inteueity of a steady light to have the sam apparent inteneity It is convenient to evaluate flashing light1 in terms of their EFFECTIVE INTENSITY I 8 or EFI the intensity of a eteady light which will appear equally bright when viewed at threshold and is expressed in candelas

Chap 1 Par 2 Page 5

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Current airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights specify the following equation (known as the Blondel Rey equation) for the computation of effective inteueity

where lebull effective intensity

I(t) bull instantaneous intensity as a function of time

t2 - tibull flash time interval (seconds)

The maximum computed value ofbull-effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at tz and t1 For short time flashes t2 shy t 1becomes insignificant compared to 02 seconds and the total flash is intearated

Short-duration flashtube lights have been used primarily as suppleshymentary lights Since flashtubes in general produce relatively small proportions of red light about 90 percent of the light is lost in passing it through a red filter Therefore in order to use this source for an anti-collision light it is necessary to operate them at higher energy levels than has been comDOn in the small supplementary lights

3 COLOR The sensation of color is closely related to the wavelength of light and varies with the individual and the conditions of viewing Usually a color is said to have three psychological c0111ponents (red blue orange etc) brightness and saturation (the amount a color differs from a grey of the same brightness) A measure of hue sufficiently reliable for signal-color specification is the wavelength of the part of the spectrum required to be mixed with the equal-energy(white) source to produce the color this wavelength is called the dominant wavelength of the color -Saturation ia satisfactorily specified by the ratio of the distance on the CIE chromaticity diagram (See Figure lS) from the equal-energy point to the color point to the distance from equal-energy point in the same direction to the spectrum locus This ratio is called purity

Chap l Par 3Page 6

29 July 1971 AC 20bull74

It can be shown that any color can be matched by combining three properly choeea colors called pr111111ry colors If a colored sample is placed in OGe half of a photo11etric field a mixture ~f three primary colors such as red green and bbe in the other half of the field can be made to match the colored sample to the satisfaction of the eye This is done by varying the relative brightness of the three pdury colors A problem with this method is that the matching judgment of one obaerver cannot be taken as representative of the average person Only when a large number of observers are used in each experibullnt can consistent values be obtained for the relative brightne88 of primary colors required to match any given color In order to avoid this difficulty the tristimulus method was revised and standardiHd ftlree primary colors were agreed upon thea by expertbullnta with a number of normal observers standard values for the relative amounts of each primary color were established to match each wavelength in the visible spectrum These numbers were associated witha standard observer With these values made available in 1931 by the COllliaaion Internationale de LEclairage (CIE) a more objective and ecoaomcal teclmicie is available to specify color Figure 14 is a graphical presentation of the relative amounts of each primary color required to bulltch any wavelength Standard notation for these functions is i for the red primary y for the green primary and z for the blue primary It should be noted that the f function has been adjusted to correspond to the luminous-efficiency function Figure 12) Table 12 shows the values of these functions in tabular form

eoo eoo ~nm

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES ACCORDING TO THE 1931 CIE STANDARD OBSERVER

Figure 14

Chap l Page 7 Par 3

bullbull bullbull

TAe 1951 CIE _taatlanl olgtaerver Spectral trl1tlmulua TalUH of MUAlbulltDUff IPfftral trtt1mulu1 nlu11 or equal-entrn NWabulltmiddot 1peetrum 1peetrumwu1learth 0bull- T -bull 7 ~ bull bull

IH 00000180 ooou oooa 180 OtlO 08100 0001100010022 1811 t1H 811130101 000100t2 020 1110 TITO0002OOT8 OH uIll 331amp oootoo 0143 0819 800 10821 8110tOI 00000232 tOI totlllmiddot1102 13ee gtlO 0435 0012 bull 01 I 8010 000tH one 0022 111 o 38t ta1~ 0002t20 Utt OOtO ll middotUrMIi bullbull 10 0002421 tu8 0011 10191 TIH 1210 00012839 out l1858 eao410 HH 2810 0000t I 1285 0118 11210 Ill Hit 2110 0000Ital 0210 UtTl MOtJO tt1t 1110t I Hat 02111 1182 HI 1908 II 2 bull 0

no 1382 0180 U121 1 middot=middot0000middotA101187411 Ot80 Uttl middot1l 811 te 0000teO lt08 oeoo 1880 fl8 Utt 0810 0000t81 2511 0739 10281 tel 1212 OU8t10 ltllt 0810 12878 t10 OITt 0320 =tTI H21 1128 1ot19 eta 0281 0000oea3tlO 091UI 1390 08110 eao OITO 00003etH 01180 1893 81 2 8H 121 0111tlO 2080 4812g120 810 0221 008tH bull UT 2588 aaaa 811 0118 0011 II100 OOtl 1230 2120 TOO out oou 0000IOIJ 002 t073 TOG2121 0029 00003311IUO 0093 1030 108 TIO 158 00003321118 8082 1117 TH0201 OOtl ll 00001120 083 1100 OTII TIO 0021 0010 0000

1098 T93202g OIT8 1211 0020 0007Hllll 8820 Ot22 180 OOH 0005 smIla 2257 9H9 0288 TH 0010 OOOt 0000HO 29ot 911t0 0208 TtO 0007 0003HI 1111 8803 out Tt5 0001 0002 =HO 43U 1910 0081 TIIO 0003 0001 0000HI 11121 10002 00111 TOIi 0002 0001 00001180 Htl OHIO 0039 T80 0002 0001 00007H 0027g78e 1811 0001 0000 0000Hamp 1121 120 0021 170 0001 0000 0000 HH11g gu5 TTIgg1e 0000 0000Ill bull 103 8100 bull 1T TSO 0000 0000 = -shy- shyTotal _____

211713 2l17lt 21ITU

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES

Table 12

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Capital lettere x Y aad Z have bean ubulliped u ootatioa formiddotthe aaouate of tbe three pribullriea required to viaually utch a color containing multiple wavelengthbull Thue valuea can be plotted ~raphically if the following traneformationa are made

x bull X (2) y y (3) z z (4) X+1+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

where X Y and z are the amounts of the three primaries ana x y and z are the chrobullticity coordinates in the CU system The horizontal of the graph becomes x and the vertical becomes y z may be obtained from the relationship x + y + z bull 1 Such a graph shown in Figure 1S 18 called a chromaticity diagram Any color may be located 011 the diagram by specifying its chromaticity coordinates The colors used middotfor lighting of aircraft are shown with the limits ae established by the airworthiness regulations On this diagram there is a central white point marked 1where X bull Y bull Z correapondi111 to the color of a source having an equalshyeDergy spectrum All x + y + z bull 1 this white point appears graphically at x bull 33t y bull 333 and represents a position of zero purity The outer periphery of this diagram is a locus of points of 100 purity for visible wavelengths A line draw from any point on tbi8 periphery to the point of equal energy (I) represents all purities between 100 and O for that domlnant wavelengt~ For exa111ple a line is ahawn for a light of dominant wavelength o aicrobullters with the 0 50 and 100 purity points indicated An aviation green light of this dominant wavelength would have to have a purity of only 32 to bullet the regulatory requirements Aviation red however would require a purity of nearly 100

The te111perature scale along the bottom of the diagram showiDg a range from 1000 K to infinity contains calibrations for source color te111peratures Note tbat each cemperature has a calibration bullrk 011

the curved line above The curved line is called the Planckian locus and represents the chrobullticitiea of blackbodies at different teaperaturea In practical applicationa it is accepted as representing the chromaticities of incandescent bodiea 1Ncb u lamp filaments The numbers along thia curve 011 the CU diagramp11 indicate the color temperature in Kelvins Cll illuminant A can be represented on this curve at the 2854 I point illuminant B at about SOOO K and C at about 6800 K llluliinant A represents the spectral distribution of typical tungsten-fihment incandescent lamps iilum~nant B represents- the spectral discributioa of average noon sunlight and illuminant C represents the spectral distribution of average daylight

Chap l Page 9Par l 41bullU O bull ti bullI

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 6: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

bullbullbullbull

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTEI 1

PllOPEBIIESOF LIGHT

1 GENDAL Light is visually evaluated radiant energybull Like other forms of radiant energy light travels through space at a constant velocity of 3000001 000 meters per second Light energy may be considered as having a sinusoidal wave form stimulating vision only over a narrow band of wavelengths (Fig 11) Within this band the amplitude affects the vuual sensation of brightneS8 and the wavelength the visual sensation of hue The longest waves produce a sensation of red and the shortest a sensation of violet By definition white occurs when all visible wavelengths are combined in equal amounts The appearance of white however may be produced when certain critical ones are combined If the light covers a narrow band of wavelengths a certain hue is seen Black is usually treated as the absence of sti111Ulation The wavelength of light may be expressed in micrometers (~m) equal to 10-6 meters in nanometers (am) equal to 10-9 meters or in angstroms on equal to 10-10 bulltera middot

WAVELENGTH IN METERS 10-1 104 10bull

ltampOIO WAVII bullttRampbullltlD bull-cbullbullobullbull CIRCUITS

I I I I

I I

I I VISIBLE SPECTRUM

I

700

I lt

HN YlampLOW OltampNamp I II

400 500 100 bull WAVELENGTH IN NANOMETERS

111VISIBLE SPECTRUM

igure 11

t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln

t----4--f-__J--___J-_--4

Chap l Page 1Par 1

29 July 1971AC 20bull 74

The sensitivity of the eye bovever varies withia this visible spectrum Radiant energy atdiffereut wavelengths produces varying sensations of brightness even though the amount of energy received is the same at each wavelength Figure 12 and Table 11 shaw that the eye is twice as sensitive to a yellow-green of 555 nanometers as it is to a green of 510 nm This cur-e is referred to u spectral sensitivity of the human eye or luminous efficiency When the intensity of colored lights is measured this variable sensitivity of the eye must be taken into consideration In other words a red light IILISt be auch higher in power to appear equally as bright as a green light The detecting device therefore 1111st be corrected for the response of the staadard observer if the reading is to indicate luminous (visual) output middot The numbers associatedwith Figure 12 and Table 11 are referred to as spectral luminous efficiencies It should be remembered that lumens and candelas are associated with visible light and as the sensitivity of the eye decreases so does the amount of lumens for the same radiant pover This is evidenced in the conversion from watts to lwaens luminous flux in lumens bull 680 V()) times the radiant flux inwatts

2 INTENSITY The luminous flux being emitted from a point source if the light is middotemitted equally in all directions may be represented by a sphere Light flux is rate of flow of visible energy The basic unit of flux is the lumen which by definition is equal to l4w times the total flux emitted by a uniform point source of one candela The flux emitted by a point source per unit solid angle (steradian) is called intensity A steradian is defined as that solid angle originating at the center of a sphere and subtending an area on the sphere surface equal to the square of the sphere radius Intensity is measured 1a lumens per steradian and a uniform point source equal to one candela has an intensity in every direction of one lumen per steradian Intensity in a given direction is usually expressed in candelas and is often called candlepower

The luminous flux density received on a surface (illuminance) varies with the intensity of the source and inversely as the square of the distance from the source to the surface Illuminance is expressed in lumens per unit area or footcandles Figure 13 shows that as the distance from a source increases one lumen is spread over increasing areas and the illuminance decreases The relation of illuminance to distance from the source is referred to as the inverse square law The illuminance from a given source varies inversely as the square of the distance from that source Doubling the distance causes the illuminance to decrease to one fourth As measurements of a light source are usually done with instruments which measure illuminance the distance aist be known before the intensity of the source can be determined In other words footcandles times the distance squared gives candelas For example if a footcandle reading of 10 is measured at 10 feet from the source the intensity is 1000 candelas

Chap 1 Par 1 Page 2

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

(-shy gt bull

gtshyu 2 LIJ-u Iamp- 06 Iamp LIJ u 0 z 2 - 04 _ _ ct a t-u LLI G Cl)

Chap 1 Par 2

o

09

08

01

05

VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I

r I

1

I I

REO

03

02

Ot

J

I I

V L shy0

380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740

WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS

STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)

Figure 12

Page 3

AC 20- 74 29 July 1971

1931 CI STANlgtAlU) OBSPBVEB

WAVELENGTH NANOMETEIS

380

390

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

470

480

490

500

510

S20

S30

540

sso

560

570

Page 4

SPECTllAL LUMINOUS WAVEIBllnB EFFICIENCY V(l) IWICltBTDS

00000 S80

00001 590

00004 600

00012 610

00040 620

01116 630

00230 640

00380 650 00600 660

00910 670

01390 680

02080 690

03230 700

OS030 710

07100 720

08620 730

09540 740

099SO 7SO

099S0 760

09520 770

SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCYbull

Table 11

SPBCTllAL LUMINOUS ElPICIENCY V ())

08700

07570

06310

OS030

03810

02650

01750

01070

00610

00320

00170

00082

00041

00021

00010

oooos

00003

00001

00001

00000

V00

Chap 1 Pu 2

29 July 1971 AC 20- 74

----INTENSITY bullI CANDELA= I LUMENSTERADlff

~t----------lMETER ________ _____ IFT ___

I CM

AREA=ICM 1

ILLUMINANCEbull I LUMENCM 1

AREAt Fll ILLUMINANCE I LUMENFT 1

AREA= I METERt ILLUMINANCE a f LUMENM1

INTBNSITY AND ILLUMDIATION

Figure 13

Fluhing lightbull are u1ed exten1ively a1 1ignals and warnings because of their superiority ira attractuag attention Becauae of thia characteristic flashing beacoae were eatabliahed bullbull the required lighting for anticollision light8 These beacona are of Hveral types rotating flashing incandesshycent oscillating and gu discharge (strobe)

When a light aignal cOQlists of separate flashes cile maximum intensity during the flash must be greater than the inteueity of a steady light to have the sam apparent inteneity It is convenient to evaluate flashing light1 in terms of their EFFECTIVE INTENSITY I 8 or EFI the intensity of a eteady light which will appear equally bright when viewed at threshold and is expressed in candelas

Chap 1 Par 2 Page 5

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Current airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights specify the following equation (known as the Blondel Rey equation) for the computation of effective inteueity

where lebull effective intensity

I(t) bull instantaneous intensity as a function of time

t2 - tibull flash time interval (seconds)

The maximum computed value ofbull-effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at tz and t1 For short time flashes t2 shy t 1becomes insignificant compared to 02 seconds and the total flash is intearated

Short-duration flashtube lights have been used primarily as suppleshymentary lights Since flashtubes in general produce relatively small proportions of red light about 90 percent of the light is lost in passing it through a red filter Therefore in order to use this source for an anti-collision light it is necessary to operate them at higher energy levels than has been comDOn in the small supplementary lights

3 COLOR The sensation of color is closely related to the wavelength of light and varies with the individual and the conditions of viewing Usually a color is said to have three psychological c0111ponents (red blue orange etc) brightness and saturation (the amount a color differs from a grey of the same brightness) A measure of hue sufficiently reliable for signal-color specification is the wavelength of the part of the spectrum required to be mixed with the equal-energy(white) source to produce the color this wavelength is called the dominant wavelength of the color -Saturation ia satisfactorily specified by the ratio of the distance on the CIE chromaticity diagram (See Figure lS) from the equal-energy point to the color point to the distance from equal-energy point in the same direction to the spectrum locus This ratio is called purity

Chap l Par 3Page 6

29 July 1971 AC 20bull74

It can be shown that any color can be matched by combining three properly choeea colors called pr111111ry colors If a colored sample is placed in OGe half of a photo11etric field a mixture ~f three primary colors such as red green and bbe in the other half of the field can be made to match the colored sample to the satisfaction of the eye This is done by varying the relative brightness of the three pdury colors A problem with this method is that the matching judgment of one obaerver cannot be taken as representative of the average person Only when a large number of observers are used in each experibullnt can consistent values be obtained for the relative brightne88 of primary colors required to match any given color In order to avoid this difficulty the tristimulus method was revised and standardiHd ftlree primary colors were agreed upon thea by expertbullnta with a number of normal observers standard values for the relative amounts of each primary color were established to match each wavelength in the visible spectrum These numbers were associated witha standard observer With these values made available in 1931 by the COllliaaion Internationale de LEclairage (CIE) a more objective and ecoaomcal teclmicie is available to specify color Figure 14 is a graphical presentation of the relative amounts of each primary color required to bulltch any wavelength Standard notation for these functions is i for the red primary y for the green primary and z for the blue primary It should be noted that the f function has been adjusted to correspond to the luminous-efficiency function Figure 12) Table 12 shows the values of these functions in tabular form

eoo eoo ~nm

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES ACCORDING TO THE 1931 CIE STANDARD OBSERVER

Figure 14

Chap l Page 7 Par 3

bullbull bullbull

TAe 1951 CIE _taatlanl olgtaerver Spectral trl1tlmulua TalUH of MUAlbulltDUff IPfftral trtt1mulu1 nlu11 or equal-entrn NWabulltmiddot 1peetrum 1peetrumwu1learth 0bull- T -bull 7 ~ bull bull

IH 00000180 ooou oooa 180 OtlO 08100 0001100010022 1811 t1H 811130101 000100t2 020 1110 TITO0002OOT8 OH uIll 331amp oootoo 0143 0819 800 10821 8110tOI 00000232 tOI totlllmiddot1102 13ee gtlO 0435 0012 bull 01 I 8010 000tH one 0022 111 o 38t ta1~ 0002t20 Utt OOtO ll middotUrMIi bullbull 10 0002421 tu8 0011 10191 TIH 1210 00012839 out l1858 eao410 HH 2810 0000t I 1285 0118 11210 Ill Hit 2110 0000Ital 0210 UtTl MOtJO tt1t 1110t I Hat 02111 1182 HI 1908 II 2 bull 0

no 1382 0180 U121 1 middot=middot0000middotA101187411 Ot80 Uttl middot1l 811 te 0000teO lt08 oeoo 1880 fl8 Utt 0810 0000t81 2511 0739 10281 tel 1212 OU8t10 ltllt 0810 12878 t10 OITt 0320 =tTI H21 1128 1ot19 eta 0281 0000oea3tlO 091UI 1390 08110 eao OITO 00003etH 01180 1893 81 2 8H 121 0111tlO 2080 4812g120 810 0221 008tH bull UT 2588 aaaa 811 0118 0011 II100 OOtl 1230 2120 TOO out oou 0000IOIJ 002 t073 TOG2121 0029 00003311IUO 0093 1030 108 TIO 158 00003321118 8082 1117 TH0201 OOtl ll 00001120 083 1100 OTII TIO 0021 0010 0000

1098 T93202g OIT8 1211 0020 0007Hllll 8820 Ot22 180 OOH 0005 smIla 2257 9H9 0288 TH 0010 OOOt 0000HO 29ot 911t0 0208 TtO 0007 0003HI 1111 8803 out Tt5 0001 0002 =HO 43U 1910 0081 TIIO 0003 0001 0000HI 11121 10002 00111 TOIi 0002 0001 00001180 Htl OHIO 0039 T80 0002 0001 00007H 0027g78e 1811 0001 0000 0000Hamp 1121 120 0021 170 0001 0000 0000 HH11g gu5 TTIgg1e 0000 0000Ill bull 103 8100 bull 1T TSO 0000 0000 = -shy- shyTotal _____

211713 2l17lt 21ITU

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES

Table 12

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Capital lettere x Y aad Z have bean ubulliped u ootatioa formiddotthe aaouate of tbe three pribullriea required to viaually utch a color containing multiple wavelengthbull Thue valuea can be plotted ~raphically if the following traneformationa are made

x bull X (2) y y (3) z z (4) X+1+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

where X Y and z are the amounts of the three primaries ana x y and z are the chrobullticity coordinates in the CU system The horizontal of the graph becomes x and the vertical becomes y z may be obtained from the relationship x + y + z bull 1 Such a graph shown in Figure 1S 18 called a chromaticity diagram Any color may be located 011 the diagram by specifying its chromaticity coordinates The colors used middotfor lighting of aircraft are shown with the limits ae established by the airworthiness regulations On this diagram there is a central white point marked 1where X bull Y bull Z correapondi111 to the color of a source having an equalshyeDergy spectrum All x + y + z bull 1 this white point appears graphically at x bull 33t y bull 333 and represents a position of zero purity The outer periphery of this diagram is a locus of points of 100 purity for visible wavelengths A line draw from any point on tbi8 periphery to the point of equal energy (I) represents all purities between 100 and O for that domlnant wavelengt~ For exa111ple a line is ahawn for a light of dominant wavelength o aicrobullters with the 0 50 and 100 purity points indicated An aviation green light of this dominant wavelength would have to have a purity of only 32 to bullet the regulatory requirements Aviation red however would require a purity of nearly 100

The te111perature scale along the bottom of the diagram showiDg a range from 1000 K to infinity contains calibrations for source color te111peratures Note tbat each cemperature has a calibration bullrk 011

the curved line above The curved line is called the Planckian locus and represents the chrobullticitiea of blackbodies at different teaperaturea In practical applicationa it is accepted as representing the chromaticities of incandescent bodiea 1Ncb u lamp filaments The numbers along thia curve 011 the CU diagramp11 indicate the color temperature in Kelvins Cll illuminant A can be represented on this curve at the 2854 I point illuminant B at about SOOO K and C at about 6800 K llluliinant A represents the spectral distribution of typical tungsten-fihment incandescent lamps iilum~nant B represents- the spectral discributioa of average noon sunlight and illuminant C represents the spectral distribution of average daylight

Chap l Page 9Par l 41bullU O bull ti bullI

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 7: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971AC 20bull 74

The sensitivity of the eye bovever varies withia this visible spectrum Radiant energy atdiffereut wavelengths produces varying sensations of brightness even though the amount of energy received is the same at each wavelength Figure 12 and Table 11 shaw that the eye is twice as sensitive to a yellow-green of 555 nanometers as it is to a green of 510 nm This cur-e is referred to u spectral sensitivity of the human eye or luminous efficiency When the intensity of colored lights is measured this variable sensitivity of the eye must be taken into consideration In other words a red light IILISt be auch higher in power to appear equally as bright as a green light The detecting device therefore 1111st be corrected for the response of the staadard observer if the reading is to indicate luminous (visual) output middot The numbers associatedwith Figure 12 and Table 11 are referred to as spectral luminous efficiencies It should be remembered that lumens and candelas are associated with visible light and as the sensitivity of the eye decreases so does the amount of lumens for the same radiant pover This is evidenced in the conversion from watts to lwaens luminous flux in lumens bull 680 V()) times the radiant flux inwatts

2 INTENSITY The luminous flux being emitted from a point source if the light is middotemitted equally in all directions may be represented by a sphere Light flux is rate of flow of visible energy The basic unit of flux is the lumen which by definition is equal to l4w times the total flux emitted by a uniform point source of one candela The flux emitted by a point source per unit solid angle (steradian) is called intensity A steradian is defined as that solid angle originating at the center of a sphere and subtending an area on the sphere surface equal to the square of the sphere radius Intensity is measured 1a lumens per steradian and a uniform point source equal to one candela has an intensity in every direction of one lumen per steradian Intensity in a given direction is usually expressed in candelas and is often called candlepower

The luminous flux density received on a surface (illuminance) varies with the intensity of the source and inversely as the square of the distance from the source to the surface Illuminance is expressed in lumens per unit area or footcandles Figure 13 shows that as the distance from a source increases one lumen is spread over increasing areas and the illuminance decreases The relation of illuminance to distance from the source is referred to as the inverse square law The illuminance from a given source varies inversely as the square of the distance from that source Doubling the distance causes the illuminance to decrease to one fourth As measurements of a light source are usually done with instruments which measure illuminance the distance aist be known before the intensity of the source can be determined In other words footcandles times the distance squared gives candelas For example if a footcandle reading of 10 is measured at 10 feet from the source the intensity is 1000 candelas

Chap 1 Par 1 Page 2

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

(-shy gt bull

gtshyu 2 LIJ-u Iamp- 06 Iamp LIJ u 0 z 2 - 04 _ _ ct a t-u LLI G Cl)

Chap 1 Par 2

o

09

08

01

05

VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I

r I

1

I I

REO

03

02

Ot

J

I I

V L shy0

380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740

WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS

STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)

Figure 12

Page 3

AC 20- 74 29 July 1971

1931 CI STANlgtAlU) OBSPBVEB

WAVELENGTH NANOMETEIS

380

390

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

470

480

490

500

510

S20

S30

540

sso

560

570

Page 4

SPECTllAL LUMINOUS WAVEIBllnB EFFICIENCY V(l) IWICltBTDS

00000 S80

00001 590

00004 600

00012 610

00040 620

01116 630

00230 640

00380 650 00600 660

00910 670

01390 680

02080 690

03230 700

OS030 710

07100 720

08620 730

09540 740

099SO 7SO

099S0 760

09520 770

SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCYbull

Table 11

SPBCTllAL LUMINOUS ElPICIENCY V ())

08700

07570

06310

OS030

03810

02650

01750

01070

00610

00320

00170

00082

00041

00021

00010

oooos

00003

00001

00001

00000

V00

Chap 1 Pu 2

29 July 1971 AC 20- 74

----INTENSITY bullI CANDELA= I LUMENSTERADlff

~t----------lMETER ________ _____ IFT ___

I CM

AREA=ICM 1

ILLUMINANCEbull I LUMENCM 1

AREAt Fll ILLUMINANCE I LUMENFT 1

AREA= I METERt ILLUMINANCE a f LUMENM1

INTBNSITY AND ILLUMDIATION

Figure 13

Fluhing lightbull are u1ed exten1ively a1 1ignals and warnings because of their superiority ira attractuag attention Becauae of thia characteristic flashing beacoae were eatabliahed bullbull the required lighting for anticollision light8 These beacona are of Hveral types rotating flashing incandesshycent oscillating and gu discharge (strobe)

When a light aignal cOQlists of separate flashes cile maximum intensity during the flash must be greater than the inteueity of a steady light to have the sam apparent inteneity It is convenient to evaluate flashing light1 in terms of their EFFECTIVE INTENSITY I 8 or EFI the intensity of a eteady light which will appear equally bright when viewed at threshold and is expressed in candelas

Chap 1 Par 2 Page 5

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Current airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights specify the following equation (known as the Blondel Rey equation) for the computation of effective inteueity

where lebull effective intensity

I(t) bull instantaneous intensity as a function of time

t2 - tibull flash time interval (seconds)

The maximum computed value ofbull-effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at tz and t1 For short time flashes t2 shy t 1becomes insignificant compared to 02 seconds and the total flash is intearated

Short-duration flashtube lights have been used primarily as suppleshymentary lights Since flashtubes in general produce relatively small proportions of red light about 90 percent of the light is lost in passing it through a red filter Therefore in order to use this source for an anti-collision light it is necessary to operate them at higher energy levels than has been comDOn in the small supplementary lights

3 COLOR The sensation of color is closely related to the wavelength of light and varies with the individual and the conditions of viewing Usually a color is said to have three psychological c0111ponents (red blue orange etc) brightness and saturation (the amount a color differs from a grey of the same brightness) A measure of hue sufficiently reliable for signal-color specification is the wavelength of the part of the spectrum required to be mixed with the equal-energy(white) source to produce the color this wavelength is called the dominant wavelength of the color -Saturation ia satisfactorily specified by the ratio of the distance on the CIE chromaticity diagram (See Figure lS) from the equal-energy point to the color point to the distance from equal-energy point in the same direction to the spectrum locus This ratio is called purity

Chap l Par 3Page 6

29 July 1971 AC 20bull74

It can be shown that any color can be matched by combining three properly choeea colors called pr111111ry colors If a colored sample is placed in OGe half of a photo11etric field a mixture ~f three primary colors such as red green and bbe in the other half of the field can be made to match the colored sample to the satisfaction of the eye This is done by varying the relative brightness of the three pdury colors A problem with this method is that the matching judgment of one obaerver cannot be taken as representative of the average person Only when a large number of observers are used in each experibullnt can consistent values be obtained for the relative brightne88 of primary colors required to match any given color In order to avoid this difficulty the tristimulus method was revised and standardiHd ftlree primary colors were agreed upon thea by expertbullnta with a number of normal observers standard values for the relative amounts of each primary color were established to match each wavelength in the visible spectrum These numbers were associated witha standard observer With these values made available in 1931 by the COllliaaion Internationale de LEclairage (CIE) a more objective and ecoaomcal teclmicie is available to specify color Figure 14 is a graphical presentation of the relative amounts of each primary color required to bulltch any wavelength Standard notation for these functions is i for the red primary y for the green primary and z for the blue primary It should be noted that the f function has been adjusted to correspond to the luminous-efficiency function Figure 12) Table 12 shows the values of these functions in tabular form

eoo eoo ~nm

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES ACCORDING TO THE 1931 CIE STANDARD OBSERVER

Figure 14

Chap l Page 7 Par 3

bullbull bullbull

TAe 1951 CIE _taatlanl olgtaerver Spectral trl1tlmulua TalUH of MUAlbulltDUff IPfftral trtt1mulu1 nlu11 or equal-entrn NWabulltmiddot 1peetrum 1peetrumwu1learth 0bull- T -bull 7 ~ bull bull

IH 00000180 ooou oooa 180 OtlO 08100 0001100010022 1811 t1H 811130101 000100t2 020 1110 TITO0002OOT8 OH uIll 331amp oootoo 0143 0819 800 10821 8110tOI 00000232 tOI totlllmiddot1102 13ee gtlO 0435 0012 bull 01 I 8010 000tH one 0022 111 o 38t ta1~ 0002t20 Utt OOtO ll middotUrMIi bullbull 10 0002421 tu8 0011 10191 TIH 1210 00012839 out l1858 eao410 HH 2810 0000t I 1285 0118 11210 Ill Hit 2110 0000Ital 0210 UtTl MOtJO tt1t 1110t I Hat 02111 1182 HI 1908 II 2 bull 0

no 1382 0180 U121 1 middot=middot0000middotA101187411 Ot80 Uttl middot1l 811 te 0000teO lt08 oeoo 1880 fl8 Utt 0810 0000t81 2511 0739 10281 tel 1212 OU8t10 ltllt 0810 12878 t10 OITt 0320 =tTI H21 1128 1ot19 eta 0281 0000oea3tlO 091UI 1390 08110 eao OITO 00003etH 01180 1893 81 2 8H 121 0111tlO 2080 4812g120 810 0221 008tH bull UT 2588 aaaa 811 0118 0011 II100 OOtl 1230 2120 TOO out oou 0000IOIJ 002 t073 TOG2121 0029 00003311IUO 0093 1030 108 TIO 158 00003321118 8082 1117 TH0201 OOtl ll 00001120 083 1100 OTII TIO 0021 0010 0000

1098 T93202g OIT8 1211 0020 0007Hllll 8820 Ot22 180 OOH 0005 smIla 2257 9H9 0288 TH 0010 OOOt 0000HO 29ot 911t0 0208 TtO 0007 0003HI 1111 8803 out Tt5 0001 0002 =HO 43U 1910 0081 TIIO 0003 0001 0000HI 11121 10002 00111 TOIi 0002 0001 00001180 Htl OHIO 0039 T80 0002 0001 00007H 0027g78e 1811 0001 0000 0000Hamp 1121 120 0021 170 0001 0000 0000 HH11g gu5 TTIgg1e 0000 0000Ill bull 103 8100 bull 1T TSO 0000 0000 = -shy- shyTotal _____

211713 2l17lt 21ITU

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES

Table 12

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Capital lettere x Y aad Z have bean ubulliped u ootatioa formiddotthe aaouate of tbe three pribullriea required to viaually utch a color containing multiple wavelengthbull Thue valuea can be plotted ~raphically if the following traneformationa are made

x bull X (2) y y (3) z z (4) X+1+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

where X Y and z are the amounts of the three primaries ana x y and z are the chrobullticity coordinates in the CU system The horizontal of the graph becomes x and the vertical becomes y z may be obtained from the relationship x + y + z bull 1 Such a graph shown in Figure 1S 18 called a chromaticity diagram Any color may be located 011 the diagram by specifying its chromaticity coordinates The colors used middotfor lighting of aircraft are shown with the limits ae established by the airworthiness regulations On this diagram there is a central white point marked 1where X bull Y bull Z correapondi111 to the color of a source having an equalshyeDergy spectrum All x + y + z bull 1 this white point appears graphically at x bull 33t y bull 333 and represents a position of zero purity The outer periphery of this diagram is a locus of points of 100 purity for visible wavelengths A line draw from any point on tbi8 periphery to the point of equal energy (I) represents all purities between 100 and O for that domlnant wavelengt~ For exa111ple a line is ahawn for a light of dominant wavelength o aicrobullters with the 0 50 and 100 purity points indicated An aviation green light of this dominant wavelength would have to have a purity of only 32 to bullet the regulatory requirements Aviation red however would require a purity of nearly 100

The te111perature scale along the bottom of the diagram showiDg a range from 1000 K to infinity contains calibrations for source color te111peratures Note tbat each cemperature has a calibration bullrk 011

the curved line above The curved line is called the Planckian locus and represents the chrobullticitiea of blackbodies at different teaperaturea In practical applicationa it is accepted as representing the chromaticities of incandescent bodiea 1Ncb u lamp filaments The numbers along thia curve 011 the CU diagramp11 indicate the color temperature in Kelvins Cll illuminant A can be represented on this curve at the 2854 I point illuminant B at about SOOO K and C at about 6800 K llluliinant A represents the spectral distribution of typical tungsten-fihment incandescent lamps iilum~nant B represents- the spectral discributioa of average noon sunlight and illuminant C represents the spectral distribution of average daylight

Chap l Page 9Par l 41bullU O bull ti bullI

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 8: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

(-shy gt bull

gtshyu 2 LIJ-u Iamp- 06 Iamp LIJ u 0 z 2 - 04 _ _ ct a t-u LLI G Cl)

Chap 1 Par 2

o

09

08

01

05

VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I

r I

1

I I

REO

03

02

Ot

J

I I

V L shy0

380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740

WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS

STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)

Figure 12

Page 3

AC 20- 74 29 July 1971

1931 CI STANlgtAlU) OBSPBVEB

WAVELENGTH NANOMETEIS

380

390

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

470

480

490

500

510

S20

S30

540

sso

560

570

Page 4

SPECTllAL LUMINOUS WAVEIBllnB EFFICIENCY V(l) IWICltBTDS

00000 S80

00001 590

00004 600

00012 610

00040 620

01116 630

00230 640

00380 650 00600 660

00910 670

01390 680

02080 690

03230 700

OS030 710

07100 720

08620 730

09540 740

099SO 7SO

099S0 760

09520 770

SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCYbull

Table 11

SPBCTllAL LUMINOUS ElPICIENCY V ())

08700

07570

06310

OS030

03810

02650

01750

01070

00610

00320

00170

00082

00041

00021

00010

oooos

00003

00001

00001

00000

V00

Chap 1 Pu 2

29 July 1971 AC 20- 74

----INTENSITY bullI CANDELA= I LUMENSTERADlff

~t----------lMETER ________ _____ IFT ___

I CM

AREA=ICM 1

ILLUMINANCEbull I LUMENCM 1

AREAt Fll ILLUMINANCE I LUMENFT 1

AREA= I METERt ILLUMINANCE a f LUMENM1

INTBNSITY AND ILLUMDIATION

Figure 13

Fluhing lightbull are u1ed exten1ively a1 1ignals and warnings because of their superiority ira attractuag attention Becauae of thia characteristic flashing beacoae were eatabliahed bullbull the required lighting for anticollision light8 These beacona are of Hveral types rotating flashing incandesshycent oscillating and gu discharge (strobe)

When a light aignal cOQlists of separate flashes cile maximum intensity during the flash must be greater than the inteueity of a steady light to have the sam apparent inteneity It is convenient to evaluate flashing light1 in terms of their EFFECTIVE INTENSITY I 8 or EFI the intensity of a eteady light which will appear equally bright when viewed at threshold and is expressed in candelas

Chap 1 Par 2 Page 5

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Current airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights specify the following equation (known as the Blondel Rey equation) for the computation of effective inteueity

where lebull effective intensity

I(t) bull instantaneous intensity as a function of time

t2 - tibull flash time interval (seconds)

The maximum computed value ofbull-effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at tz and t1 For short time flashes t2 shy t 1becomes insignificant compared to 02 seconds and the total flash is intearated

Short-duration flashtube lights have been used primarily as suppleshymentary lights Since flashtubes in general produce relatively small proportions of red light about 90 percent of the light is lost in passing it through a red filter Therefore in order to use this source for an anti-collision light it is necessary to operate them at higher energy levels than has been comDOn in the small supplementary lights

3 COLOR The sensation of color is closely related to the wavelength of light and varies with the individual and the conditions of viewing Usually a color is said to have three psychological c0111ponents (red blue orange etc) brightness and saturation (the amount a color differs from a grey of the same brightness) A measure of hue sufficiently reliable for signal-color specification is the wavelength of the part of the spectrum required to be mixed with the equal-energy(white) source to produce the color this wavelength is called the dominant wavelength of the color -Saturation ia satisfactorily specified by the ratio of the distance on the CIE chromaticity diagram (See Figure lS) from the equal-energy point to the color point to the distance from equal-energy point in the same direction to the spectrum locus This ratio is called purity

Chap l Par 3Page 6

29 July 1971 AC 20bull74

It can be shown that any color can be matched by combining three properly choeea colors called pr111111ry colors If a colored sample is placed in OGe half of a photo11etric field a mixture ~f three primary colors such as red green and bbe in the other half of the field can be made to match the colored sample to the satisfaction of the eye This is done by varying the relative brightness of the three pdury colors A problem with this method is that the matching judgment of one obaerver cannot be taken as representative of the average person Only when a large number of observers are used in each experibullnt can consistent values be obtained for the relative brightne88 of primary colors required to match any given color In order to avoid this difficulty the tristimulus method was revised and standardiHd ftlree primary colors were agreed upon thea by expertbullnta with a number of normal observers standard values for the relative amounts of each primary color were established to match each wavelength in the visible spectrum These numbers were associated witha standard observer With these values made available in 1931 by the COllliaaion Internationale de LEclairage (CIE) a more objective and ecoaomcal teclmicie is available to specify color Figure 14 is a graphical presentation of the relative amounts of each primary color required to bulltch any wavelength Standard notation for these functions is i for the red primary y for the green primary and z for the blue primary It should be noted that the f function has been adjusted to correspond to the luminous-efficiency function Figure 12) Table 12 shows the values of these functions in tabular form

eoo eoo ~nm

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES ACCORDING TO THE 1931 CIE STANDARD OBSERVER

Figure 14

Chap l Page 7 Par 3

bullbull bullbull

TAe 1951 CIE _taatlanl olgtaerver Spectral trl1tlmulua TalUH of MUAlbulltDUff IPfftral trtt1mulu1 nlu11 or equal-entrn NWabulltmiddot 1peetrum 1peetrumwu1learth 0bull- T -bull 7 ~ bull bull

IH 00000180 ooou oooa 180 OtlO 08100 0001100010022 1811 t1H 811130101 000100t2 020 1110 TITO0002OOT8 OH uIll 331amp oootoo 0143 0819 800 10821 8110tOI 00000232 tOI totlllmiddot1102 13ee gtlO 0435 0012 bull 01 I 8010 000tH one 0022 111 o 38t ta1~ 0002t20 Utt OOtO ll middotUrMIi bullbull 10 0002421 tu8 0011 10191 TIH 1210 00012839 out l1858 eao410 HH 2810 0000t I 1285 0118 11210 Ill Hit 2110 0000Ital 0210 UtTl MOtJO tt1t 1110t I Hat 02111 1182 HI 1908 II 2 bull 0

no 1382 0180 U121 1 middot=middot0000middotA101187411 Ot80 Uttl middot1l 811 te 0000teO lt08 oeoo 1880 fl8 Utt 0810 0000t81 2511 0739 10281 tel 1212 OU8t10 ltllt 0810 12878 t10 OITt 0320 =tTI H21 1128 1ot19 eta 0281 0000oea3tlO 091UI 1390 08110 eao OITO 00003etH 01180 1893 81 2 8H 121 0111tlO 2080 4812g120 810 0221 008tH bull UT 2588 aaaa 811 0118 0011 II100 OOtl 1230 2120 TOO out oou 0000IOIJ 002 t073 TOG2121 0029 00003311IUO 0093 1030 108 TIO 158 00003321118 8082 1117 TH0201 OOtl ll 00001120 083 1100 OTII TIO 0021 0010 0000

1098 T93202g OIT8 1211 0020 0007Hllll 8820 Ot22 180 OOH 0005 smIla 2257 9H9 0288 TH 0010 OOOt 0000HO 29ot 911t0 0208 TtO 0007 0003HI 1111 8803 out Tt5 0001 0002 =HO 43U 1910 0081 TIIO 0003 0001 0000HI 11121 10002 00111 TOIi 0002 0001 00001180 Htl OHIO 0039 T80 0002 0001 00007H 0027g78e 1811 0001 0000 0000Hamp 1121 120 0021 170 0001 0000 0000 HH11g gu5 TTIgg1e 0000 0000Ill bull 103 8100 bull 1T TSO 0000 0000 = -shy- shyTotal _____

211713 2l17lt 21ITU

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES

Table 12

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Capital lettere x Y aad Z have bean ubulliped u ootatioa formiddotthe aaouate of tbe three pribullriea required to viaually utch a color containing multiple wavelengthbull Thue valuea can be plotted ~raphically if the following traneformationa are made

x bull X (2) y y (3) z z (4) X+1+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

where X Y and z are the amounts of the three primaries ana x y and z are the chrobullticity coordinates in the CU system The horizontal of the graph becomes x and the vertical becomes y z may be obtained from the relationship x + y + z bull 1 Such a graph shown in Figure 1S 18 called a chromaticity diagram Any color may be located 011 the diagram by specifying its chromaticity coordinates The colors used middotfor lighting of aircraft are shown with the limits ae established by the airworthiness regulations On this diagram there is a central white point marked 1where X bull Y bull Z correapondi111 to the color of a source having an equalshyeDergy spectrum All x + y + z bull 1 this white point appears graphically at x bull 33t y bull 333 and represents a position of zero purity The outer periphery of this diagram is a locus of points of 100 purity for visible wavelengths A line draw from any point on tbi8 periphery to the point of equal energy (I) represents all purities between 100 and O for that domlnant wavelengt~ For exa111ple a line is ahawn for a light of dominant wavelength o aicrobullters with the 0 50 and 100 purity points indicated An aviation green light of this dominant wavelength would have to have a purity of only 32 to bullet the regulatory requirements Aviation red however would require a purity of nearly 100

The te111perature scale along the bottom of the diagram showiDg a range from 1000 K to infinity contains calibrations for source color te111peratures Note tbat each cemperature has a calibration bullrk 011

the curved line above The curved line is called the Planckian locus and represents the chrobullticitiea of blackbodies at different teaperaturea In practical applicationa it is accepted as representing the chromaticities of incandescent bodiea 1Ncb u lamp filaments The numbers along thia curve 011 the CU diagramp11 indicate the color temperature in Kelvins Cll illuminant A can be represented on this curve at the 2854 I point illuminant B at about SOOO K and C at about 6800 K llluliinant A represents the spectral distribution of typical tungsten-fihment incandescent lamps iilum~nant B represents- the spectral discributioa of average noon sunlight and illuminant C represents the spectral distribution of average daylight

Chap l Page 9Par l 41bullU O bull ti bullI

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 9: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

AC 20- 74 29 July 1971

1931 CI STANlgtAlU) OBSPBVEB

WAVELENGTH NANOMETEIS

380

390

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

470

480

490

500

510

S20

S30

540

sso

560

570

Page 4

SPECTllAL LUMINOUS WAVEIBllnB EFFICIENCY V(l) IWICltBTDS

00000 S80

00001 590

00004 600

00012 610

00040 620

01116 630

00230 640

00380 650 00600 660

00910 670

01390 680

02080 690

03230 700

OS030 710

07100 720

08620 730

09540 740

099SO 7SO

099S0 760

09520 770

SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCYbull

Table 11

SPBCTllAL LUMINOUS ElPICIENCY V ())

08700

07570

06310

OS030

03810

02650

01750

01070

00610

00320

00170

00082

00041

00021

00010

oooos

00003

00001

00001

00000

V00

Chap 1 Pu 2

29 July 1971 AC 20- 74

----INTENSITY bullI CANDELA= I LUMENSTERADlff

~t----------lMETER ________ _____ IFT ___

I CM

AREA=ICM 1

ILLUMINANCEbull I LUMENCM 1

AREAt Fll ILLUMINANCE I LUMENFT 1

AREA= I METERt ILLUMINANCE a f LUMENM1

INTBNSITY AND ILLUMDIATION

Figure 13

Fluhing lightbull are u1ed exten1ively a1 1ignals and warnings because of their superiority ira attractuag attention Becauae of thia characteristic flashing beacoae were eatabliahed bullbull the required lighting for anticollision light8 These beacona are of Hveral types rotating flashing incandesshycent oscillating and gu discharge (strobe)

When a light aignal cOQlists of separate flashes cile maximum intensity during the flash must be greater than the inteueity of a steady light to have the sam apparent inteneity It is convenient to evaluate flashing light1 in terms of their EFFECTIVE INTENSITY I 8 or EFI the intensity of a eteady light which will appear equally bright when viewed at threshold and is expressed in candelas

Chap 1 Par 2 Page 5

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Current airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights specify the following equation (known as the Blondel Rey equation) for the computation of effective inteueity

where lebull effective intensity

I(t) bull instantaneous intensity as a function of time

t2 - tibull flash time interval (seconds)

The maximum computed value ofbull-effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at tz and t1 For short time flashes t2 shy t 1becomes insignificant compared to 02 seconds and the total flash is intearated

Short-duration flashtube lights have been used primarily as suppleshymentary lights Since flashtubes in general produce relatively small proportions of red light about 90 percent of the light is lost in passing it through a red filter Therefore in order to use this source for an anti-collision light it is necessary to operate them at higher energy levels than has been comDOn in the small supplementary lights

3 COLOR The sensation of color is closely related to the wavelength of light and varies with the individual and the conditions of viewing Usually a color is said to have three psychological c0111ponents (red blue orange etc) brightness and saturation (the amount a color differs from a grey of the same brightness) A measure of hue sufficiently reliable for signal-color specification is the wavelength of the part of the spectrum required to be mixed with the equal-energy(white) source to produce the color this wavelength is called the dominant wavelength of the color -Saturation ia satisfactorily specified by the ratio of the distance on the CIE chromaticity diagram (See Figure lS) from the equal-energy point to the color point to the distance from equal-energy point in the same direction to the spectrum locus This ratio is called purity

Chap l Par 3Page 6

29 July 1971 AC 20bull74

It can be shown that any color can be matched by combining three properly choeea colors called pr111111ry colors If a colored sample is placed in OGe half of a photo11etric field a mixture ~f three primary colors such as red green and bbe in the other half of the field can be made to match the colored sample to the satisfaction of the eye This is done by varying the relative brightness of the three pdury colors A problem with this method is that the matching judgment of one obaerver cannot be taken as representative of the average person Only when a large number of observers are used in each experibullnt can consistent values be obtained for the relative brightne88 of primary colors required to match any given color In order to avoid this difficulty the tristimulus method was revised and standardiHd ftlree primary colors were agreed upon thea by expertbullnta with a number of normal observers standard values for the relative amounts of each primary color were established to match each wavelength in the visible spectrum These numbers were associated witha standard observer With these values made available in 1931 by the COllliaaion Internationale de LEclairage (CIE) a more objective and ecoaomcal teclmicie is available to specify color Figure 14 is a graphical presentation of the relative amounts of each primary color required to bulltch any wavelength Standard notation for these functions is i for the red primary y for the green primary and z for the blue primary It should be noted that the f function has been adjusted to correspond to the luminous-efficiency function Figure 12) Table 12 shows the values of these functions in tabular form

eoo eoo ~nm

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES ACCORDING TO THE 1931 CIE STANDARD OBSERVER

Figure 14

Chap l Page 7 Par 3

bullbull bullbull

TAe 1951 CIE _taatlanl olgtaerver Spectral trl1tlmulua TalUH of MUAlbulltDUff IPfftral trtt1mulu1 nlu11 or equal-entrn NWabulltmiddot 1peetrum 1peetrumwu1learth 0bull- T -bull 7 ~ bull bull

IH 00000180 ooou oooa 180 OtlO 08100 0001100010022 1811 t1H 811130101 000100t2 020 1110 TITO0002OOT8 OH uIll 331amp oootoo 0143 0819 800 10821 8110tOI 00000232 tOI totlllmiddot1102 13ee gtlO 0435 0012 bull 01 I 8010 000tH one 0022 111 o 38t ta1~ 0002t20 Utt OOtO ll middotUrMIi bullbull 10 0002421 tu8 0011 10191 TIH 1210 00012839 out l1858 eao410 HH 2810 0000t I 1285 0118 11210 Ill Hit 2110 0000Ital 0210 UtTl MOtJO tt1t 1110t I Hat 02111 1182 HI 1908 II 2 bull 0

no 1382 0180 U121 1 middot=middot0000middotA101187411 Ot80 Uttl middot1l 811 te 0000teO lt08 oeoo 1880 fl8 Utt 0810 0000t81 2511 0739 10281 tel 1212 OU8t10 ltllt 0810 12878 t10 OITt 0320 =tTI H21 1128 1ot19 eta 0281 0000oea3tlO 091UI 1390 08110 eao OITO 00003etH 01180 1893 81 2 8H 121 0111tlO 2080 4812g120 810 0221 008tH bull UT 2588 aaaa 811 0118 0011 II100 OOtl 1230 2120 TOO out oou 0000IOIJ 002 t073 TOG2121 0029 00003311IUO 0093 1030 108 TIO 158 00003321118 8082 1117 TH0201 OOtl ll 00001120 083 1100 OTII TIO 0021 0010 0000

1098 T93202g OIT8 1211 0020 0007Hllll 8820 Ot22 180 OOH 0005 smIla 2257 9H9 0288 TH 0010 OOOt 0000HO 29ot 911t0 0208 TtO 0007 0003HI 1111 8803 out Tt5 0001 0002 =HO 43U 1910 0081 TIIO 0003 0001 0000HI 11121 10002 00111 TOIi 0002 0001 00001180 Htl OHIO 0039 T80 0002 0001 00007H 0027g78e 1811 0001 0000 0000Hamp 1121 120 0021 170 0001 0000 0000 HH11g gu5 TTIgg1e 0000 0000Ill bull 103 8100 bull 1T TSO 0000 0000 = -shy- shyTotal _____

211713 2l17lt 21ITU

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES

Table 12

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Capital lettere x Y aad Z have bean ubulliped u ootatioa formiddotthe aaouate of tbe three pribullriea required to viaually utch a color containing multiple wavelengthbull Thue valuea can be plotted ~raphically if the following traneformationa are made

x bull X (2) y y (3) z z (4) X+1+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

where X Y and z are the amounts of the three primaries ana x y and z are the chrobullticity coordinates in the CU system The horizontal of the graph becomes x and the vertical becomes y z may be obtained from the relationship x + y + z bull 1 Such a graph shown in Figure 1S 18 called a chromaticity diagram Any color may be located 011 the diagram by specifying its chromaticity coordinates The colors used middotfor lighting of aircraft are shown with the limits ae established by the airworthiness regulations On this diagram there is a central white point marked 1where X bull Y bull Z correapondi111 to the color of a source having an equalshyeDergy spectrum All x + y + z bull 1 this white point appears graphically at x bull 33t y bull 333 and represents a position of zero purity The outer periphery of this diagram is a locus of points of 100 purity for visible wavelengths A line draw from any point on tbi8 periphery to the point of equal energy (I) represents all purities between 100 and O for that domlnant wavelengt~ For exa111ple a line is ahawn for a light of dominant wavelength o aicrobullters with the 0 50 and 100 purity points indicated An aviation green light of this dominant wavelength would have to have a purity of only 32 to bullet the regulatory requirements Aviation red however would require a purity of nearly 100

The te111perature scale along the bottom of the diagram showiDg a range from 1000 K to infinity contains calibrations for source color te111peratures Note tbat each cemperature has a calibration bullrk 011

the curved line above The curved line is called the Planckian locus and represents the chrobullticitiea of blackbodies at different teaperaturea In practical applicationa it is accepted as representing the chromaticities of incandescent bodiea 1Ncb u lamp filaments The numbers along thia curve 011 the CU diagramp11 indicate the color temperature in Kelvins Cll illuminant A can be represented on this curve at the 2854 I point illuminant B at about SOOO K and C at about 6800 K llluliinant A represents the spectral distribution of typical tungsten-fihment incandescent lamps iilum~nant B represents- the spectral discributioa of average noon sunlight and illuminant C represents the spectral distribution of average daylight

Chap l Page 9Par l 41bullU O bull ti bullI

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 10: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 20- 74

----INTENSITY bullI CANDELA= I LUMENSTERADlff

~t----------lMETER ________ _____ IFT ___

I CM

AREA=ICM 1

ILLUMINANCEbull I LUMENCM 1

AREAt Fll ILLUMINANCE I LUMENFT 1

AREA= I METERt ILLUMINANCE a f LUMENM1

INTBNSITY AND ILLUMDIATION

Figure 13

Fluhing lightbull are u1ed exten1ively a1 1ignals and warnings because of their superiority ira attractuag attention Becauae of thia characteristic flashing beacoae were eatabliahed bullbull the required lighting for anticollision light8 These beacona are of Hveral types rotating flashing incandesshycent oscillating and gu discharge (strobe)

When a light aignal cOQlists of separate flashes cile maximum intensity during the flash must be greater than the inteueity of a steady light to have the sam apparent inteneity It is convenient to evaluate flashing light1 in terms of their EFFECTIVE INTENSITY I 8 or EFI the intensity of a eteady light which will appear equally bright when viewed at threshold and is expressed in candelas

Chap 1 Par 2 Page 5

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Current airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights specify the following equation (known as the Blondel Rey equation) for the computation of effective inteueity

where lebull effective intensity

I(t) bull instantaneous intensity as a function of time

t2 - tibull flash time interval (seconds)

The maximum computed value ofbull-effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at tz and t1 For short time flashes t2 shy t 1becomes insignificant compared to 02 seconds and the total flash is intearated

Short-duration flashtube lights have been used primarily as suppleshymentary lights Since flashtubes in general produce relatively small proportions of red light about 90 percent of the light is lost in passing it through a red filter Therefore in order to use this source for an anti-collision light it is necessary to operate them at higher energy levels than has been comDOn in the small supplementary lights

3 COLOR The sensation of color is closely related to the wavelength of light and varies with the individual and the conditions of viewing Usually a color is said to have three psychological c0111ponents (red blue orange etc) brightness and saturation (the amount a color differs from a grey of the same brightness) A measure of hue sufficiently reliable for signal-color specification is the wavelength of the part of the spectrum required to be mixed with the equal-energy(white) source to produce the color this wavelength is called the dominant wavelength of the color -Saturation ia satisfactorily specified by the ratio of the distance on the CIE chromaticity diagram (See Figure lS) from the equal-energy point to the color point to the distance from equal-energy point in the same direction to the spectrum locus This ratio is called purity

Chap l Par 3Page 6

29 July 1971 AC 20bull74

It can be shown that any color can be matched by combining three properly choeea colors called pr111111ry colors If a colored sample is placed in OGe half of a photo11etric field a mixture ~f three primary colors such as red green and bbe in the other half of the field can be made to match the colored sample to the satisfaction of the eye This is done by varying the relative brightness of the three pdury colors A problem with this method is that the matching judgment of one obaerver cannot be taken as representative of the average person Only when a large number of observers are used in each experibullnt can consistent values be obtained for the relative brightne88 of primary colors required to match any given color In order to avoid this difficulty the tristimulus method was revised and standardiHd ftlree primary colors were agreed upon thea by expertbullnta with a number of normal observers standard values for the relative amounts of each primary color were established to match each wavelength in the visible spectrum These numbers were associated witha standard observer With these values made available in 1931 by the COllliaaion Internationale de LEclairage (CIE) a more objective and ecoaomcal teclmicie is available to specify color Figure 14 is a graphical presentation of the relative amounts of each primary color required to bulltch any wavelength Standard notation for these functions is i for the red primary y for the green primary and z for the blue primary It should be noted that the f function has been adjusted to correspond to the luminous-efficiency function Figure 12) Table 12 shows the values of these functions in tabular form

eoo eoo ~nm

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES ACCORDING TO THE 1931 CIE STANDARD OBSERVER

Figure 14

Chap l Page 7 Par 3

bullbull bullbull

TAe 1951 CIE _taatlanl olgtaerver Spectral trl1tlmulua TalUH of MUAlbulltDUff IPfftral trtt1mulu1 nlu11 or equal-entrn NWabulltmiddot 1peetrum 1peetrumwu1learth 0bull- T -bull 7 ~ bull bull

IH 00000180 ooou oooa 180 OtlO 08100 0001100010022 1811 t1H 811130101 000100t2 020 1110 TITO0002OOT8 OH uIll 331amp oootoo 0143 0819 800 10821 8110tOI 00000232 tOI totlllmiddot1102 13ee gtlO 0435 0012 bull 01 I 8010 000tH one 0022 111 o 38t ta1~ 0002t20 Utt OOtO ll middotUrMIi bullbull 10 0002421 tu8 0011 10191 TIH 1210 00012839 out l1858 eao410 HH 2810 0000t I 1285 0118 11210 Ill Hit 2110 0000Ital 0210 UtTl MOtJO tt1t 1110t I Hat 02111 1182 HI 1908 II 2 bull 0

no 1382 0180 U121 1 middot=middot0000middotA101187411 Ot80 Uttl middot1l 811 te 0000teO lt08 oeoo 1880 fl8 Utt 0810 0000t81 2511 0739 10281 tel 1212 OU8t10 ltllt 0810 12878 t10 OITt 0320 =tTI H21 1128 1ot19 eta 0281 0000oea3tlO 091UI 1390 08110 eao OITO 00003etH 01180 1893 81 2 8H 121 0111tlO 2080 4812g120 810 0221 008tH bull UT 2588 aaaa 811 0118 0011 II100 OOtl 1230 2120 TOO out oou 0000IOIJ 002 t073 TOG2121 0029 00003311IUO 0093 1030 108 TIO 158 00003321118 8082 1117 TH0201 OOtl ll 00001120 083 1100 OTII TIO 0021 0010 0000

1098 T93202g OIT8 1211 0020 0007Hllll 8820 Ot22 180 OOH 0005 smIla 2257 9H9 0288 TH 0010 OOOt 0000HO 29ot 911t0 0208 TtO 0007 0003HI 1111 8803 out Tt5 0001 0002 =HO 43U 1910 0081 TIIO 0003 0001 0000HI 11121 10002 00111 TOIi 0002 0001 00001180 Htl OHIO 0039 T80 0002 0001 00007H 0027g78e 1811 0001 0000 0000Hamp 1121 120 0021 170 0001 0000 0000 HH11g gu5 TTIgg1e 0000 0000Ill bull 103 8100 bull 1T TSO 0000 0000 = -shy- shyTotal _____

211713 2l17lt 21ITU

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES

Table 12

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Capital lettere x Y aad Z have bean ubulliped u ootatioa formiddotthe aaouate of tbe three pribullriea required to viaually utch a color containing multiple wavelengthbull Thue valuea can be plotted ~raphically if the following traneformationa are made

x bull X (2) y y (3) z z (4) X+1+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

where X Y and z are the amounts of the three primaries ana x y and z are the chrobullticity coordinates in the CU system The horizontal of the graph becomes x and the vertical becomes y z may be obtained from the relationship x + y + z bull 1 Such a graph shown in Figure 1S 18 called a chromaticity diagram Any color may be located 011 the diagram by specifying its chromaticity coordinates The colors used middotfor lighting of aircraft are shown with the limits ae established by the airworthiness regulations On this diagram there is a central white point marked 1where X bull Y bull Z correapondi111 to the color of a source having an equalshyeDergy spectrum All x + y + z bull 1 this white point appears graphically at x bull 33t y bull 333 and represents a position of zero purity The outer periphery of this diagram is a locus of points of 100 purity for visible wavelengths A line draw from any point on tbi8 periphery to the point of equal energy (I) represents all purities between 100 and O for that domlnant wavelengt~ For exa111ple a line is ahawn for a light of dominant wavelength o aicrobullters with the 0 50 and 100 purity points indicated An aviation green light of this dominant wavelength would have to have a purity of only 32 to bullet the regulatory requirements Aviation red however would require a purity of nearly 100

The te111perature scale along the bottom of the diagram showiDg a range from 1000 K to infinity contains calibrations for source color te111peratures Note tbat each cemperature has a calibration bullrk 011

the curved line above The curved line is called the Planckian locus and represents the chrobullticitiea of blackbodies at different teaperaturea In practical applicationa it is accepted as representing the chromaticities of incandescent bodiea 1Ncb u lamp filaments The numbers along thia curve 011 the CU diagramp11 indicate the color temperature in Kelvins Cll illuminant A can be represented on this curve at the 2854 I point illuminant B at about SOOO K and C at about 6800 K llluliinant A represents the spectral distribution of typical tungsten-fihment incandescent lamps iilum~nant B represents- the spectral discributioa of average noon sunlight and illuminant C represents the spectral distribution of average daylight

Chap l Page 9Par l 41bullU O bull ti bullI

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 11: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Current airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights specify the following equation (known as the Blondel Rey equation) for the computation of effective inteueity

where lebull effective intensity

I(t) bull instantaneous intensity as a function of time

t2 - tibull flash time interval (seconds)

The maximum computed value ofbull-effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at tz and t1 For short time flashes t2 shy t 1becomes insignificant compared to 02 seconds and the total flash is intearated

Short-duration flashtube lights have been used primarily as suppleshymentary lights Since flashtubes in general produce relatively small proportions of red light about 90 percent of the light is lost in passing it through a red filter Therefore in order to use this source for an anti-collision light it is necessary to operate them at higher energy levels than has been comDOn in the small supplementary lights

3 COLOR The sensation of color is closely related to the wavelength of light and varies with the individual and the conditions of viewing Usually a color is said to have three psychological c0111ponents (red blue orange etc) brightness and saturation (the amount a color differs from a grey of the same brightness) A measure of hue sufficiently reliable for signal-color specification is the wavelength of the part of the spectrum required to be mixed with the equal-energy(white) source to produce the color this wavelength is called the dominant wavelength of the color -Saturation ia satisfactorily specified by the ratio of the distance on the CIE chromaticity diagram (See Figure lS) from the equal-energy point to the color point to the distance from equal-energy point in the same direction to the spectrum locus This ratio is called purity

Chap l Par 3Page 6

29 July 1971 AC 20bull74

It can be shown that any color can be matched by combining three properly choeea colors called pr111111ry colors If a colored sample is placed in OGe half of a photo11etric field a mixture ~f three primary colors such as red green and bbe in the other half of the field can be made to match the colored sample to the satisfaction of the eye This is done by varying the relative brightness of the three pdury colors A problem with this method is that the matching judgment of one obaerver cannot be taken as representative of the average person Only when a large number of observers are used in each experibullnt can consistent values be obtained for the relative brightne88 of primary colors required to match any given color In order to avoid this difficulty the tristimulus method was revised and standardiHd ftlree primary colors were agreed upon thea by expertbullnta with a number of normal observers standard values for the relative amounts of each primary color were established to match each wavelength in the visible spectrum These numbers were associated witha standard observer With these values made available in 1931 by the COllliaaion Internationale de LEclairage (CIE) a more objective and ecoaomcal teclmicie is available to specify color Figure 14 is a graphical presentation of the relative amounts of each primary color required to bulltch any wavelength Standard notation for these functions is i for the red primary y for the green primary and z for the blue primary It should be noted that the f function has been adjusted to correspond to the luminous-efficiency function Figure 12) Table 12 shows the values of these functions in tabular form

eoo eoo ~nm

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES ACCORDING TO THE 1931 CIE STANDARD OBSERVER

Figure 14

Chap l Page 7 Par 3

bullbull bullbull

TAe 1951 CIE _taatlanl olgtaerver Spectral trl1tlmulua TalUH of MUAlbulltDUff IPfftral trtt1mulu1 nlu11 or equal-entrn NWabulltmiddot 1peetrum 1peetrumwu1learth 0bull- T -bull 7 ~ bull bull

IH 00000180 ooou oooa 180 OtlO 08100 0001100010022 1811 t1H 811130101 000100t2 020 1110 TITO0002OOT8 OH uIll 331amp oootoo 0143 0819 800 10821 8110tOI 00000232 tOI totlllmiddot1102 13ee gtlO 0435 0012 bull 01 I 8010 000tH one 0022 111 o 38t ta1~ 0002t20 Utt OOtO ll middotUrMIi bullbull 10 0002421 tu8 0011 10191 TIH 1210 00012839 out l1858 eao410 HH 2810 0000t I 1285 0118 11210 Ill Hit 2110 0000Ital 0210 UtTl MOtJO tt1t 1110t I Hat 02111 1182 HI 1908 II 2 bull 0

no 1382 0180 U121 1 middot=middot0000middotA101187411 Ot80 Uttl middot1l 811 te 0000teO lt08 oeoo 1880 fl8 Utt 0810 0000t81 2511 0739 10281 tel 1212 OU8t10 ltllt 0810 12878 t10 OITt 0320 =tTI H21 1128 1ot19 eta 0281 0000oea3tlO 091UI 1390 08110 eao OITO 00003etH 01180 1893 81 2 8H 121 0111tlO 2080 4812g120 810 0221 008tH bull UT 2588 aaaa 811 0118 0011 II100 OOtl 1230 2120 TOO out oou 0000IOIJ 002 t073 TOG2121 0029 00003311IUO 0093 1030 108 TIO 158 00003321118 8082 1117 TH0201 OOtl ll 00001120 083 1100 OTII TIO 0021 0010 0000

1098 T93202g OIT8 1211 0020 0007Hllll 8820 Ot22 180 OOH 0005 smIla 2257 9H9 0288 TH 0010 OOOt 0000HO 29ot 911t0 0208 TtO 0007 0003HI 1111 8803 out Tt5 0001 0002 =HO 43U 1910 0081 TIIO 0003 0001 0000HI 11121 10002 00111 TOIi 0002 0001 00001180 Htl OHIO 0039 T80 0002 0001 00007H 0027g78e 1811 0001 0000 0000Hamp 1121 120 0021 170 0001 0000 0000 HH11g gu5 TTIgg1e 0000 0000Ill bull 103 8100 bull 1T TSO 0000 0000 = -shy- shyTotal _____

211713 2l17lt 21ITU

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES

Table 12

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Capital lettere x Y aad Z have bean ubulliped u ootatioa formiddotthe aaouate of tbe three pribullriea required to viaually utch a color containing multiple wavelengthbull Thue valuea can be plotted ~raphically if the following traneformationa are made

x bull X (2) y y (3) z z (4) X+1+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

where X Y and z are the amounts of the three primaries ana x y and z are the chrobullticity coordinates in the CU system The horizontal of the graph becomes x and the vertical becomes y z may be obtained from the relationship x + y + z bull 1 Such a graph shown in Figure 1S 18 called a chromaticity diagram Any color may be located 011 the diagram by specifying its chromaticity coordinates The colors used middotfor lighting of aircraft are shown with the limits ae established by the airworthiness regulations On this diagram there is a central white point marked 1where X bull Y bull Z correapondi111 to the color of a source having an equalshyeDergy spectrum All x + y + z bull 1 this white point appears graphically at x bull 33t y bull 333 and represents a position of zero purity The outer periphery of this diagram is a locus of points of 100 purity for visible wavelengths A line draw from any point on tbi8 periphery to the point of equal energy (I) represents all purities between 100 and O for that domlnant wavelengt~ For exa111ple a line is ahawn for a light of dominant wavelength o aicrobullters with the 0 50 and 100 purity points indicated An aviation green light of this dominant wavelength would have to have a purity of only 32 to bullet the regulatory requirements Aviation red however would require a purity of nearly 100

The te111perature scale along the bottom of the diagram showiDg a range from 1000 K to infinity contains calibrations for source color te111peratures Note tbat each cemperature has a calibration bullrk 011

the curved line above The curved line is called the Planckian locus and represents the chrobullticitiea of blackbodies at different teaperaturea In practical applicationa it is accepted as representing the chromaticities of incandescent bodiea 1Ncb u lamp filaments The numbers along thia curve 011 the CU diagramp11 indicate the color temperature in Kelvins Cll illuminant A can be represented on this curve at the 2854 I point illuminant B at about SOOO K and C at about 6800 K llluliinant A represents the spectral distribution of typical tungsten-fihment incandescent lamps iilum~nant B represents- the spectral discributioa of average noon sunlight and illuminant C represents the spectral distribution of average daylight

Chap l Page 9Par l 41bullU O bull ti bullI

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 12: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 20bull74

It can be shown that any color can be matched by combining three properly choeea colors called pr111111ry colors If a colored sample is placed in OGe half of a photo11etric field a mixture ~f three primary colors such as red green and bbe in the other half of the field can be made to match the colored sample to the satisfaction of the eye This is done by varying the relative brightness of the three pdury colors A problem with this method is that the matching judgment of one obaerver cannot be taken as representative of the average person Only when a large number of observers are used in each experibullnt can consistent values be obtained for the relative brightne88 of primary colors required to match any given color In order to avoid this difficulty the tristimulus method was revised and standardiHd ftlree primary colors were agreed upon thea by expertbullnta with a number of normal observers standard values for the relative amounts of each primary color were established to match each wavelength in the visible spectrum These numbers were associated witha standard observer With these values made available in 1931 by the COllliaaion Internationale de LEclairage (CIE) a more objective and ecoaomcal teclmicie is available to specify color Figure 14 is a graphical presentation of the relative amounts of each primary color required to bulltch any wavelength Standard notation for these functions is i for the red primary y for the green primary and z for the blue primary It should be noted that the f function has been adjusted to correspond to the luminous-efficiency function Figure 12) Table 12 shows the values of these functions in tabular form

eoo eoo ~nm

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES ACCORDING TO THE 1931 CIE STANDARD OBSERVER

Figure 14

Chap l Page 7 Par 3

bullbull bullbull

TAe 1951 CIE _taatlanl olgtaerver Spectral trl1tlmulua TalUH of MUAlbulltDUff IPfftral trtt1mulu1 nlu11 or equal-entrn NWabulltmiddot 1peetrum 1peetrumwu1learth 0bull- T -bull 7 ~ bull bull

IH 00000180 ooou oooa 180 OtlO 08100 0001100010022 1811 t1H 811130101 000100t2 020 1110 TITO0002OOT8 OH uIll 331amp oootoo 0143 0819 800 10821 8110tOI 00000232 tOI totlllmiddot1102 13ee gtlO 0435 0012 bull 01 I 8010 000tH one 0022 111 o 38t ta1~ 0002t20 Utt OOtO ll middotUrMIi bullbull 10 0002421 tu8 0011 10191 TIH 1210 00012839 out l1858 eao410 HH 2810 0000t I 1285 0118 11210 Ill Hit 2110 0000Ital 0210 UtTl MOtJO tt1t 1110t I Hat 02111 1182 HI 1908 II 2 bull 0

no 1382 0180 U121 1 middot=middot0000middotA101187411 Ot80 Uttl middot1l 811 te 0000teO lt08 oeoo 1880 fl8 Utt 0810 0000t81 2511 0739 10281 tel 1212 OU8t10 ltllt 0810 12878 t10 OITt 0320 =tTI H21 1128 1ot19 eta 0281 0000oea3tlO 091UI 1390 08110 eao OITO 00003etH 01180 1893 81 2 8H 121 0111tlO 2080 4812g120 810 0221 008tH bull UT 2588 aaaa 811 0118 0011 II100 OOtl 1230 2120 TOO out oou 0000IOIJ 002 t073 TOG2121 0029 00003311IUO 0093 1030 108 TIO 158 00003321118 8082 1117 TH0201 OOtl ll 00001120 083 1100 OTII TIO 0021 0010 0000

1098 T93202g OIT8 1211 0020 0007Hllll 8820 Ot22 180 OOH 0005 smIla 2257 9H9 0288 TH 0010 OOOt 0000HO 29ot 911t0 0208 TtO 0007 0003HI 1111 8803 out Tt5 0001 0002 =HO 43U 1910 0081 TIIO 0003 0001 0000HI 11121 10002 00111 TOIi 0002 0001 00001180 Htl OHIO 0039 T80 0002 0001 00007H 0027g78e 1811 0001 0000 0000Hamp 1121 120 0021 170 0001 0000 0000 HH11g gu5 TTIgg1e 0000 0000Ill bull 103 8100 bull 1T TSO 0000 0000 = -shy- shyTotal _____

211713 2l17lt 21ITU

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES

Table 12

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Capital lettere x Y aad Z have bean ubulliped u ootatioa formiddotthe aaouate of tbe three pribullriea required to viaually utch a color containing multiple wavelengthbull Thue valuea can be plotted ~raphically if the following traneformationa are made

x bull X (2) y y (3) z z (4) X+1+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

where X Y and z are the amounts of the three primaries ana x y and z are the chrobullticity coordinates in the CU system The horizontal of the graph becomes x and the vertical becomes y z may be obtained from the relationship x + y + z bull 1 Such a graph shown in Figure 1S 18 called a chromaticity diagram Any color may be located 011 the diagram by specifying its chromaticity coordinates The colors used middotfor lighting of aircraft are shown with the limits ae established by the airworthiness regulations On this diagram there is a central white point marked 1where X bull Y bull Z correapondi111 to the color of a source having an equalshyeDergy spectrum All x + y + z bull 1 this white point appears graphically at x bull 33t y bull 333 and represents a position of zero purity The outer periphery of this diagram is a locus of points of 100 purity for visible wavelengths A line draw from any point on tbi8 periphery to the point of equal energy (I) represents all purities between 100 and O for that domlnant wavelengt~ For exa111ple a line is ahawn for a light of dominant wavelength o aicrobullters with the 0 50 and 100 purity points indicated An aviation green light of this dominant wavelength would have to have a purity of only 32 to bullet the regulatory requirements Aviation red however would require a purity of nearly 100

The te111perature scale along the bottom of the diagram showiDg a range from 1000 K to infinity contains calibrations for source color te111peratures Note tbat each cemperature has a calibration bullrk 011

the curved line above The curved line is called the Planckian locus and represents the chrobullticitiea of blackbodies at different teaperaturea In practical applicationa it is accepted as representing the chromaticities of incandescent bodiea 1Ncb u lamp filaments The numbers along thia curve 011 the CU diagramp11 indicate the color temperature in Kelvins Cll illuminant A can be represented on this curve at the 2854 I point illuminant B at about SOOO K and C at about 6800 K llluliinant A represents the spectral distribution of typical tungsten-fihment incandescent lamps iilum~nant B represents- the spectral discributioa of average noon sunlight and illuminant C represents the spectral distribution of average daylight

Chap l Page 9Par l 41bullU O bull ti bullI

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 13: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

bullbull bullbull

TAe 1951 CIE _taatlanl olgtaerver Spectral trl1tlmulua TalUH of MUAlbulltDUff IPfftral trtt1mulu1 nlu11 or equal-entrn NWabulltmiddot 1peetrum 1peetrumwu1learth 0bull- T -bull 7 ~ bull bull

IH 00000180 ooou oooa 180 OtlO 08100 0001100010022 1811 t1H 811130101 000100t2 020 1110 TITO0002OOT8 OH uIll 331amp oootoo 0143 0819 800 10821 8110tOI 00000232 tOI totlllmiddot1102 13ee gtlO 0435 0012 bull 01 I 8010 000tH one 0022 111 o 38t ta1~ 0002t20 Utt OOtO ll middotUrMIi bullbull 10 0002421 tu8 0011 10191 TIH 1210 00012839 out l1858 eao410 HH 2810 0000t I 1285 0118 11210 Ill Hit 2110 0000Ital 0210 UtTl MOtJO tt1t 1110t I Hat 02111 1182 HI 1908 II 2 bull 0

no 1382 0180 U121 1 middot=middot0000middotA101187411 Ot80 Uttl middot1l 811 te 0000teO lt08 oeoo 1880 fl8 Utt 0810 0000t81 2511 0739 10281 tel 1212 OU8t10 ltllt 0810 12878 t10 OITt 0320 =tTI H21 1128 1ot19 eta 0281 0000oea3tlO 091UI 1390 08110 eao OITO 00003etH 01180 1893 81 2 8H 121 0111tlO 2080 4812g120 810 0221 008tH bull UT 2588 aaaa 811 0118 0011 II100 OOtl 1230 2120 TOO out oou 0000IOIJ 002 t073 TOG2121 0029 00003311IUO 0093 1030 108 TIO 158 00003321118 8082 1117 TH0201 OOtl ll 00001120 083 1100 OTII TIO 0021 0010 0000

1098 T93202g OIT8 1211 0020 0007Hllll 8820 Ot22 180 OOH 0005 smIla 2257 9H9 0288 TH 0010 OOOt 0000HO 29ot 911t0 0208 TtO 0007 0003HI 1111 8803 out Tt5 0001 0002 =HO 43U 1910 0081 TIIO 0003 0001 0000HI 11121 10002 00111 TOIi 0002 0001 00001180 Htl OHIO 0039 T80 0002 0001 00007H 0027g78e 1811 0001 0000 0000Hamp 1121 120 0021 170 0001 0000 0000 HH11g gu5 TTIgg1e 0000 0000Ill bull 103 8100 bull 1T TSO 0000 0000 = -shy- shyTotal _____

211713 2l17lt 21ITU

SPECTRAL TRISTIMULUS VALUES

Table 12

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Capital lettere x Y aad Z have bean ubulliped u ootatioa formiddotthe aaouate of tbe three pribullriea required to viaually utch a color containing multiple wavelengthbull Thue valuea can be plotted ~raphically if the following traneformationa are made

x bull X (2) y y (3) z z (4) X+1+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

where X Y and z are the amounts of the three primaries ana x y and z are the chrobullticity coordinates in the CU system The horizontal of the graph becomes x and the vertical becomes y z may be obtained from the relationship x + y + z bull 1 Such a graph shown in Figure 1S 18 called a chromaticity diagram Any color may be located 011 the diagram by specifying its chromaticity coordinates The colors used middotfor lighting of aircraft are shown with the limits ae established by the airworthiness regulations On this diagram there is a central white point marked 1where X bull Y bull Z correapondi111 to the color of a source having an equalshyeDergy spectrum All x + y + z bull 1 this white point appears graphically at x bull 33t y bull 333 and represents a position of zero purity The outer periphery of this diagram is a locus of points of 100 purity for visible wavelengths A line draw from any point on tbi8 periphery to the point of equal energy (I) represents all purities between 100 and O for that domlnant wavelengt~ For exa111ple a line is ahawn for a light of dominant wavelength o aicrobullters with the 0 50 and 100 purity points indicated An aviation green light of this dominant wavelength would have to have a purity of only 32 to bullet the regulatory requirements Aviation red however would require a purity of nearly 100

The te111perature scale along the bottom of the diagram showiDg a range from 1000 K to infinity contains calibrations for source color te111peratures Note tbat each cemperature has a calibration bullrk 011

the curved line above The curved line is called the Planckian locus and represents the chrobullticitiea of blackbodies at different teaperaturea In practical applicationa it is accepted as representing the chromaticities of incandescent bodiea 1Ncb u lamp filaments The numbers along thia curve 011 the CU diagramp11 indicate the color temperature in Kelvins Cll illuminant A can be represented on this curve at the 2854 I point illuminant B at about SOOO K and C at about 6800 K llluliinant A represents the spectral distribution of typical tungsten-fihment incandescent lamps iilum~nant B represents- the spectral discributioa of average noon sunlight and illuminant C represents the spectral distribution of average daylight

Chap l Page 9Par l 41bullU O bull ti bullI

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 14: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Capital lettere x Y aad Z have bean ubulliped u ootatioa formiddotthe aaouate of tbe three pribullriea required to viaually utch a color containing multiple wavelengthbull Thue valuea can be plotted ~raphically if the following traneformationa are made

x bull X (2) y y (3) z z (4) X+1+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

where X Y and z are the amounts of the three primaries ana x y and z are the chrobullticity coordinates in the CU system The horizontal of the graph becomes x and the vertical becomes y z may be obtained from the relationship x + y + z bull 1 Such a graph shown in Figure 1S 18 called a chromaticity diagram Any color may be located 011 the diagram by specifying its chromaticity coordinates The colors used middotfor lighting of aircraft are shown with the limits ae established by the airworthiness regulations On this diagram there is a central white point marked 1where X bull Y bull Z correapondi111 to the color of a source having an equalshyeDergy spectrum All x + y + z bull 1 this white point appears graphically at x bull 33t y bull 333 and represents a position of zero purity The outer periphery of this diagram is a locus of points of 100 purity for visible wavelengths A line draw from any point on tbi8 periphery to the point of equal energy (I) represents all purities between 100 and O for that domlnant wavelengt~ For exa111ple a line is ahawn for a light of dominant wavelength o aicrobullters with the 0 50 and 100 purity points indicated An aviation green light of this dominant wavelength would have to have a purity of only 32 to bullet the regulatory requirements Aviation red however would require a purity of nearly 100

The te111perature scale along the bottom of the diagram showiDg a range from 1000 K to infinity contains calibrations for source color te111peratures Note tbat each cemperature has a calibration bullrk 011

the curved line above The curved line is called the Planckian locus and represents the chrobullticitiea of blackbodies at different teaperaturea In practical applicationa it is accepted as representing the chromaticities of incandescent bodiea 1Ncb u lamp filaments The numbers along thia curve 011 the CU diagramp11 indicate the color temperature in Kelvins Cll illuminant A can be represented on this curve at the 2854 I point illuminant B at about SOOO K and C at about 6800 K llluliinant A represents the spectral distribution of typical tungsten-fihment incandescent lamps iilum~nant B represents- the spectral discributioa of average noon sunlight and illuminant C represents the spectral distribution of average daylight

Chap l Page 9Par l 41bullU O bull ti bullI

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 15: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 197iAC 20-74

0 I

CLE CHROMATICITY DIAGRAM

bull

IOUAL ClflllOY AT I CII ILLUNINANf bullabullat Hl4 bull shy+

US AVIATION COLOR LIMITSc1----t----t---=~~~~~~____ie

AVIATION tlllHII

y04H

bullbull

0

+ YtAWHeTe cIE CIIRClfATICllY DIAGRAM

11lCTIVE U AUtilJST 1971 ~PRlOrt TO HAUCIUSTte7t Figure 15

Pap 10 Chap 1 Par 3

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 16: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

AC 20-7429 July 1971

1be color of an object depenfis on the spectral characteristics of the illuminant as well as the nature of the object For example fabrics change color when moved from the light of ordinary tungstenshyfilament bulbs to fluorescent light Any accurate system of color specification must account for this fact by relating the color to a specified light source In specifying a color that is going to be used under known conditions of illumination the tristimulus values for the standard illuminant conforming most closely to those conditions should be used bull For example in coloring an aviation red light cover the color temperature of the light-source must be considered

Some red glass filters change color as their temperatures change As the temperature increases the light passing through some red filters becomes more red (longer wavelength) and less intense For this reason red-niters are generally designed tobe near the yellow limit (shortest wavelength) at room temperature Then if the operating glass temperature is consistently higher than room temperature aviation red light will be produced under all operating conditions By designing to this yellow Umit the maximum intensity will also be obtained Glass of other colors changes slightly with temperature but not enough to be a problem

Chap 1 Page ll(and 12)Par 8

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 17: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 A~ 20-74

bull CHAPTER 2

MEASUREMENT COHSIDERAnONS

4 GENERAL The meascrement of visible radiated energy ls called photometry Instruments for measurement of the amount of a light regardless of their calibration measure only flux and care must be taken when converting to various photometric units An additional precaution is necessary because photosensitive devicesunless properly filtered do not have the same charactedstics as the human eye

There are four general types of light measurements

a middotLuminous Intensity - lbe luminous flux emitted per unit solid angle in a given direction (candelas)

b bull Illumbumce - lbe luminous flux incident per unit area on a surface at some distance from the source (footcandles)

c LWD1nance - Luminous intensity per nit projected area of surface (candelas per square foot)

d Chromaticity - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

In addition to the above light measurements the efficiency of light covers is sometimes measured lbere are two terms associated with such efficiency measurements spectral transmittance (1) which refers to the ratio of transmitted to incident power at one wavelength or -a very narrow band of wavelengths and lWllinous transmittance (T) which is the ratio of transmitted to incident total lipt power The transmittance of a light cover indicates the decrease in light due to material and color and can be used to adjust luminous intensity values 111easured without the cover The filtered light may be measured directly provided the photometer is equipped with filters which accurately match the lwainoua-efficiency function

S INTENSITY The instrument used to measure the luminous intensity of lights is called a photometer Photometers can be placed in two general classes ~ual and direct-reading photoelectric

a Visual Photometers Before the invention of photoelectric cells most instruments for measuring intensity employed the principle of balancing two adjacent fields visually With these photometers a test light and a standard light of known intensity were viewed

Chap 2 Page 13 Par 4

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 18: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

AC middotzo74 29 July 1971

siaultaneously By adjusting the relative distances from the viewing point a balance was obtained and by applying the inverse square law the intensity of the test light coulJ be Jetermin~J Although visual photometers have generally beEn supcrseJed by direct-reading photoelectric type instruments many are still belng used

b Direct-Reading Photoelectric Photometers Photoelectric devices are now being used to detect and convert light energy to electrical energy for measurement A photometric system for precisely measuring the magnitude and coverage of aircraft lights usually consists of the following

(1) Goniometer This device includes an attachment position for the light unit which can be moved around two axes of freedom The vertical and horizontal positions are calibrated and in so111e cases the information is remoted to recorders so that a plot of intensity vs direction can be made directly A goniometer of this type is installed in the photometric labor~tory of the Nationel Bureau of Standards in Washington D C

(2) Tunnel and track A dark tunnel including baffles to eliminate stray light is located in line with the goniometer A photodetector is placed on a carrier which can be moved on a track to vary the distance between the goniometer and the photodetector Position information is usually remoted to a recorder

(3) Photodetector Photodetectors are of several types and read-out in units such as milliwatts microamperes etc By conversion factors footcandies (illuminance) can be computed from the read-out Theu11 by means of the distance information a calculation of intensity can be made For steady lights measurements are concerned with rate of flow of light entering the eye analogous to gallons per minute into a container For flashing lights however the measurements are concerned with the quantity of light per flash entering the eye analogous to galloas The quantitiesmiddot are proportional to footcandles and footcandle-seconds respectively Since the inatantaneous illuminance varies during exposure to nasbing lights integration is necessary to determine the footcandle-seconds As discussed in paragraph 2 of Chapter 1 the computation of effective intensity requires a candela-seconcl measurement Candela-seconds

Chap 2 Page 14 Par 5

I

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 19: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

can be coaputed from footcaadlbull Ncoada by 11ampltiplyiq b the diatace (in feet) bullquared care t be taken not to overload a photodetector by too mch liaht u it caa saturate ad ita rupoue becoae aon 1~

Integrating photometers are available which electronically perform the integration ancl read out the total exposure in 111crocoulombs These photometers are used only on short duration strobes where the entire flash is integrated A 111crocoulomb is a microampere-second and a calibration factor ia used to coavert a llicrocoulolllb reading to footcandle-seconds Then IIUltiplyiAg by the distance squaredmiddot middot gives caAdela-secoads corrupoading to the numerator of the equation for effective intelSity

Strip recorders or recording oscilloscopes are generally used for longer duration flashu such as rotatingbeacons and bullcbaaical iategratiOD is then performed

(

800

600 en z w t shy 400 ~

200

-

j

~ I -J -

l

J_

I INCH

~2-t 1 f 05 SEC-SratP IECOIDDIG or FLASB

tigure 21

Pipre 21 ehowe aa example of a recording aade by a etrip recorcler The paper 1a IIOled horisoatally at a liDear rate so that each division repreeeate approximately bull05 eecoada bull the recorder is calibrated so that each vertical divi81011 represents 100 candalaa After the fluh ia recorded a bullchanical integrator (plaaimeter) is ued to trace the recordiag and obtain the area in candela-seconde between the limits of t2 aad t1 bull This area divided by 02 + t2 - t 1 gives tbe effective intensity The values of t2 and by and are selected to bullxlmJze the computed effective iatelSity 1n the

Cbap 2 Par 2 Page lS

t1 are deteralAed experilllentati011

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 20: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 2Q- 74

example of figure 21 the flash has an area betwen t 2 and t1 of approximately 51 candela-seconds When divided by03 seconds (02 + 01) the effective intensity is 170 candelas The peak intensity of 850 candelastherefore has an effective intensity of only 170 candelas A method for selecting t2 and t 1 is given in Chapt~r J

When measuring colored flashing lights the pi)otodetector cannot always be relied upon to givemiddotaccurate results even with luminous-efficiency-correction filters The alternative is to measure the effective intensity with a clear cover and then with a spectrophotometer determine the relative luminous transmittances of the ao COTeramp The effective intensity value measured through the clear cover is then reduced by this luminous transmittance factormiddot Spectrophotometers are discussed in paragraph 3 ~middot

J fQQbull Color can be evaluated with a visual photometer by comparing a sample against a filter of known color In such comparisons the same correct color temperature should be used for both sources However there has been increasing interest in the use of photoelectric instruments for the measurementof chromaticity of colored lights The following is a discussion of some of these instruments

a Spectrophotometer Spectrophotometers break up a self-contained light source into a spectrum by prisms or gratings~ so that narrow bands within the visible spectrum can be individually applied to a test ware (such as a light cover) Although these are not single wavelengths they are very narrow bands approximately five nanometers wide Determining either luminous transmittance (T) or chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) with a spectrophotometer involves the measurement of 40 transmittances (t) spaced 10 nanometers apart throughout the visiblemiddotspectrum Mathematically these transmittances are used as follows

(7)(6)X bull ~88xEttigt (5)

The values for x y and i are found in Table 12 and represent the relative amounts of primaries required at each wavelength theE in the equations represents the spectral distribution of the light

source and is published for certain illumfoants such as CIE Source A Tables are available which list the products il ~ and U for certain illuminants (NBS Monograph 104) These numbers are sometimes found on a computation flgtrm as shown in table 2 l If the light is not a standard source a table 111st be developed from measurements of the energy distribution When each of the 40 lines have measured values fort logged the remainder of the sheet can be filled out with data computed by hand calculating machine or computer For example assume a measured value fort at 380 nanometers of 0078 Then iEt would be 0078 yT would be 0000 and Ur would be 0468

Chap 2 Page 16 Par 5

- ~

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 21: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

Guide for Computation of x y t aad T Observer c11 Staadard 1931

Sample

Basic Stiaulua Equal Eneray llluadaut Planck 28S6 ~

cc11 standard Agt

Wave Leqth Nanometers T iE YE iE xEt iET iET 380 o l 0 6 390 o 5 0 23 400 o 19 l 93 410 o 71 2 340 420 o 262 8 1256 430 o 649 27 3167 440 o 926 61 4647 450 o 1031 117 543S 460 o 1019 210 S8Sl 470 o 776 362 S116 480 o 428 622 3636 490 0 160 1039 2324 500 o 2 1792 1509 Sl0 520

o o

57 425

3080 4771

969 sB

530 o 1214 6322 309 540 o 231 7600 162 5SO o 3U 8568 75 560 0 S510 9222 36 570 o 7571 9457 21 580 0 9H 9221 Ii 590 o 11579 8540 12 600 610

0 0

12704 12669

7547iJH

10 4

620 0 1133 5071 5 630 o 8980 3704 640 o 65Si 2562 650 o 4336 1637 660 o 2Hi 972 670 o 144i 530 680 o 804 292 690 o 404 1ii 700 0 201 75 710 720

0 o

llO 40 19

730 o 28 10 740 o 14 6 750 o -6middot 2 160 a 4 2 710 o 2

SUMS 109828 100000 3SS47 Xbull Ybull z y

xbulliiyiz ~i+t+i zbull --X+Y+Z X z

z 1 and zx 1CXgtHPUTATJON FOBM

Table 21 Chap 2 Par 6 Page 17

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 22: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971AC 20-74

r Su11111ing the column for xEt would yield X which is tht relative

i

amount of red primary required for the match Y and Z can b~ foundwith the other two columns Then the chroaiticity coordinates for representing the sample on a chromaticity diagram or evaluation against regulatory requirements is fund as follows

X X y y z = z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

The luminous transmittance T of the ware can be found from the same computation sheet as follows n1e sum (Y) is divided by the sum of the yE colwnn

of the 9Et column This is possible

because y and V(A) values(lumioous-efficiencies)are identical For example if the sum of the yEt column is 24407 dividing by 100000 gives 24407 or 244 The values given in this cable have been adjusted so that the sum of the yE column is a pOW~r middot of ten to simplify computations This means that only 244~ of thelight incident on the ware is being transmitted through it A more detailed explanation is given in the Appendix as Tristimulus Colorimetry and Aviation Lights

b Spectroradiometer Spectroradiometers are similar to spectroshyphotometers but cau be used to measure the spectral distribution of external sources over the visible spectrum

a wider ran2e of wavelengths than just

c Brightness Meters When evaluating the color of ware with these instruments a standard filter is used for comparison The results are not chromaticity coordinates (x y and z) but are in or out of tolerance indications Such procedures due to filter limitations are used only on highly saturated red glass (sharp cut-off)

One method of determining whether a color 111eets a specific requirementby using a brightness meter and a NBS filter is given in MIL-L-25467C The filter specified in this procedure has a yellow limit corresponding to instrument and panel lighting red (National Bureau of Standards Filter No 321S) However the procedure has been used with an aviation red filter (NBS Filter No 3647A) The procedure is a GoNo-Go measurement with the NBS filter used as a measurement standard A brightness reading is taken of a colored aviation light at 10 ft distance A second reading is taken after a NBS filter is added in the light path The ratio of these 2 readings must approximate a similar ratio obtained using a white light source in place of the colored aviation light In the second case a first reading is made with

Chap 2Page 18 Par 6

bullmiddotmiddotmiddot

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 23: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

AC 20-7429 July 1971

one NBS filter and tbe second reading is made with two NBS filten In this way the aviatioa light color is compared to the NBS filter color The two ratios must not differ over 3 (in the yellow direction) to qualify the test light color

d Tristimulus Colorimeters If the response of three photocells could be adjusted by glass filters so their responses follow the curves of the c1E Standard Observeri y and i (see Figure 14) they could be made to yield direct measurements of tristimulus values X Y and z Complete success of these colorimeters depends on the ability to duplicate the CIE Standard Observer System Acceptable instruments Cl)Uld simplify the measurements and reduce the required data processing Presently such instruments have more application to production line measurements than for showing initial compliance

7 TEMPERATURE EFFECTS All glass filtering elements have their color and transmittance affected in varying degrees by increased temperature The change is more pronounced for red than for other colors One manufacturer of glass baa publi1bed data such that different red glasses are identified by their percent transmittance at room temperature For example red glasses are identified as 126 253 etc~at 78deg F For each number the color and transmittance at any temperature up to 500deg Fis charted and plotted Most red glass colors are reversible up to the softening temperature(over 800degF) Reversibility means that after beating when the temperature i8 returned to 78deg F the original color will return Glasses that have transmittances of 25 or more at 1sbull F have transshymittance vs temperature curves which are essentially linear up to 300deg F and transmittaces chanae approximately 05 for each 10deg F change in temperature

In application of these filters proper evaluation of their color characteriatic at elevated temperatures requires knowing the following

a The initial glue temperature color and trans111ission

b The range of glass temperatures found in operation

c The type glaH used in the filter and its characteriatics Generally an increase in r~d glass temperature makes its color more red and decreases ua translliesion The amount of such changes is determined by the temperature range of the glass in operation and the characshyteristics of the alaaa

Chap 2 Page 19(nd 20)Par 6

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 24: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

AC 20-7429 July 1971

CHAPTER 3

MEASUREMENT DATA

8 GENERAL Aircraft exterior lightson which measurements are required include position and anticollision lights Measurements include intensity (coverage and overlap) and color

a Position Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft position lights are given in FAR 231385 through 231397 FAlt 2S1385 through 2S1397 FAlt 271385 through 271397 and FAlt 291385 through 291397

(1) Intensities

(a) Horizontal Coverage Figure 31 shows the minimum intensity requiremeats for the horizontal plane at 0deg vertical Overlap limits are not shOWD as they vary when inteasities exceed 100 candelas bull middot

(b) Vertical Coverage Figure 32 shows the minimum intensities for any vertical plane The value of I indicates the maxillum required candelas for a given horizontal position

(2) Color A graphical presentation of the chromaticity coordinate limits for aviation red (left) aviation green (right) and aviation white (rear)is shown in figure 15

b Anticollision Lights The airworthiness requirements for aircraft anticollision lights are given in FARs 231401 25 1401 27 1401 and 291401

Cl) Intensity amp Coverage Figure 33

(2) Color Each anticollision light llllampt be either aviation red or ivrition white

t POSITION LIGlIT DATA

a Intensity Measurement of position light intensity requires photometric equipment such as that described in Chapter 2paragraph 2 Figure 34 and 35 show typical recordings asmiddotmade in a_photometric laboratory lbbull data elaould include enough diatribution plots to ade11_uately eubatantiate coverage The following data should be sufficient

Forward Bad and Green Position Lights A horizontal distribution curve in the zero degree vertical plane from directly forward outboard through 110 degrees (fiaure 34) Vertical distribution curves fr011 90 degreea up to 90 degrees down at O 10 20~ and 110 degree horizontal points (figure 35) In addition to these distribution

Chap 3 Page 21Par 8

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 25: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

AC 20-74 29 July l97l

bull urvls a visual lnspetion through tht enli re nnbull41 shm1hl htbull llldbullle to determine whether or not there are any not I cih le 11lrnd1ws or areas wh~re visual observation would lttd-hHt bullj11cstionc1blc conformme lf any sud 11uesti11nnhl anbull1s II

uotul turther aHrnsurements should be made in those arna t Jeaaonil11te satisfatory coverage

II- ~l l~_i_tion ligl~middot horizonrd distrihution from 70 dlgrtes right tgt 70 rltigrits left middot dirctly to thl nbull1r Three vertfal dhlributlon urve rom 90 degrees up to 91 l~greus Jown through the fol luwlng horizontal points dirbullN ly tcri 70 lugne~ lutl of di rctlmiddot1 to the riar Jnd 0 dl~grmiddotics n~ht of dir~ctly to the rear Laboratory reports of such awasuremtnts should lso ln1 lude at haSt the followiug

(11 A li11t of the test equipment and calibration dates for light ~tandards which should show calibration against the lab working standard within the past JO days and thu working standard against the lab primary standard within the last J80 d~ys The laborat9ry primary standard should be traceable to the Nntional Bureau of Standards

(2) If~ luminous~(ficiency-corrcction filter is included data adjustment for filter errors should ba shown and substantiated

(3) Ii transmittance measurc111ents aru used the data should show ~1Jjustment for the comparison in transmittance between any r ltar filter useJ during the intensity measurements and the transmittance of the colored filter If a clear cover is usid it should have the identical shape as the colored cover Transmittance data should be shOoln on a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Also if a spectrophotometer is used it should be substantiated that the sample used in the ~asurements is representative of the actual light cover

(4) ~1en red glass is used the data should show the temperature f 1ight covers during measurements and data on the transmittance characteristics relative to temperature Measured intensity values $hould be adjusted as follows

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place adjust the intensity values to those corresponding to an ambient temperature of 100degP If no actual measurement is made with an ambient temperature of 100degF extrapolation should be supported by data

Page 22

(b) When transmittance data i~ used values should be adjusted to correspond to a glass temperature equivalent to that of the outside surface of the light cover Glass temperature measurements should be made after the glass has stabilized with an ambient temperature of at least 100degF Optionally a temperature of 130degF should be allowed in lieu of measured temperature Chap J

Par~

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 26: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC ZlJ-74

(S) A description of the procedure used to obtain intensity and transaqttance data including the calculations A diagram of the test set-up is desirable This description and diagram should show

(a) Intensity measurements made from a distance sufficient to give accurate results with the linear operating range of the photocell of prime consideration The distance should always be at least 10 times the diameter of the light source and preferably greater (See IES LiRhtinR Handbook 4th Edition page 4-18)

(b) Voltage measurements made as near the light source as possible using a suitable meter when considering accuracy and loading Current readings should also be recorded and data supplied to show where the lamp falls with respect to the manufacturing tolerance limits

b ~- Position tight color measurements require equipment such as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 3bull Aviation green conformance should be showo with data in chromaticity-coordinate form (x y and z) Aviation red conformance should be shown by the same type data or by the optional brightness meter and filter method When spectrophotometric procedures are used the data should include a computation sheet such as shown in Table 21 Laboratory reports which accompany the data should include at least the following

(1) A list of the test equipment with when applicable calibration dates

(2) When red glass is used the data should include the temperatur~ of light covers during color measurements and data on the color characteristics relative to temperature Red glass data should also include the following

(a) For measurements made with the red cover in place substantiating data to show that the color will be within limits when the outside temperature of ~he glass 18 78bullF

(b) If chromaticity-coordinate measurements are made measured values should be adjusted to those corresponding to an outside cover glass temperature of 78degF

(3) A description of the ~rocedure used to obtain the color data A diagTam of the test set-up is desirable

Chap 3 Page 23 Par 9

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 27: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

3 ANTICOLLlSION LIGHT DATA

a Intensity Measurements for effective intensity require techniques as described in Chapter 2 paragraph 2bO) The light may be measured as a white light and the intensity values adjusted according to the tranmitlance of thi red cover The comput3tion slu~et used to determine the chromaticity-lmiddotoordinates contains the data for determining the luminous transmittance of the red cover lf a clear cover is ustd in the intensity measurements the ratio of the transmittances ~r the tw~ cuvers -bull bt used to correct the data

middotro shaw fi lJ of covfra~t d rombinilt ion of vertical and horizontal measureme1Hs is lh~~sary Figure J6 is a typical pr~sentation ltgtf vertical et fectivc intensity dist rihution and is shown with the FAA minimum intensity requirements Such lurves are constructeltd from points representing separat~ tftective intensity measurements

_Tomiddot assure sufficimt points to 1urntely draw the vertical distribushytion curve mcasuremints are us111ll made at vertical angles of t30deg t20deg j_10deg 5 and o lbree of nine such points are shown in Figure 36 To obtain the values for the three points individual intensity vs time curves are recorded and processed The processing for long duration type lights can be done from a paper recording using a planimeter for area measurements Horizontal coverage must also be substantiated As the curve of Figure 36 r~presents a single horizontal direction there should be enough measuTements to assure complete field of coverage In other words it should be substantiated thit any variations in vertical patterns around the light will not result in an out of tolerance condition at any horizontal position

When using the Blondel-Iley equation the maximum val~e of effective intensity is obtained when t2 and t 1 are chosen so that the effective intensity is equal to the instantaneous intensity at t2 and t1 To compute the highest possible effective intensity value for a given curve estimates should be made until the proper values for t2 and t1 have been ~ determined When the instantaneous intensity at the t 2 and t1 points approximate the effective intensity value computed from the Blondel-Rey equation the maximum computed value has been found Figures-37 and 38 haw examples of data and include the mechanics for determining maximum computable intensity for points A B and C of Figure 36 The heat correction factors used in Figures 37 and 38 are used because the light cover is at a higher temperature in the laboratory than in actual operation For rotating beacon measurements the motor is stopped and the light is concentrated on a particular area of th~ glass As mentioned before red glass decreases in transmittance with heat

Chap 3Page 24 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 28: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 0-74

For short tibull flashes such as those produced by flashtube unite an integrattng type photometer is generally used 1heee iutrumnte integrate the wole flash rather than between specific limits If an integrating photometer is ueed the bullnufacturers calibration and operation procedures should be follOW1Jd For typical flashtube measurements the value of - tl ie negligible compared to 02 secondst2Computed effect ve intensity for these lights is therefore maxilillua when the entire flash is included Effective intensity for short time fluhee can be found by the following relation

ootcandle-1econd1 (meter reading x distance squared+ 02 seconds

To improve the accuracy several flashes are integrated and an average 18 taken Figure 3 9 is an example of typical flashcube meaeurement data Information furnished usually includes the charge voltage flash capacity electrical energy stored (watt-sec) flash rate and the plane of measurement In the example the 156 watt-seconds results from the equation

Energybull 12 s2c = 12 (420)2 c11nc10middot6

The 156 watt-seconds of electrical energy is partially converted to light energy If reflectors and gas conversion efficiency are considered the watt-second number can be used to estimate possible candelas The test distance is given so that the meter reading is convertible to candelas The multiplier (12S) in the example results from o202 In the tabled data therefore the single flash footcandlemiddotsecond reading times 12S give effective intensity

_Laboratory reports of such measurements should include at least the following

(1) A list of test equipment and calibration dates as discussed in paragraph 2a(l)

(2) Luminous-efficiency-correction filter data as discussed in paragraph 2a(2)

(3) Transmittarue data as discussed in paragraph 2a(3)

(4) Temperature corrections as discussed in paragraph 2a(4) If a heat correction factor is used it should be substantiated by data

(5) Procedure information as discussed in paragraph 2a(S) For anticollision lights this information should also include the bullthod used to determine effective intensity

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 25

__ObullflbullJ

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 29: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

2CJ Julymiddotmiddot l 97 ~shyAC 20-74

(6) For strobe sources the spectral distribution data used in transmittance computations should be substantiated by data showing apectroradiometer mttsurements or pub 1ishtd data which can be shown Le be 3PI I i cab le

h Color Th~ meiure~nL fur culotmiddot r an anticoll is ion llght red middotover is usuallv mad with a Hlectrophotometer In this measurement thl canputation heel (Table 21) should cnntain values for spectral ditllrihurmiddotiou whirla are representative of the light sourcl being u~ebullf Premiddotmiddotiomputed values for ex Ey and Ei are avJf labl fo1 many typ~ sourllS and are id1ml ified by color temperature NBS Monltgrih 104 has several dampmples The olor tempcrJture and lite val111~i fu1middot 1-i Ey aud Iz must be accurately known if the 1cs11lt a1e lo be dependable

Labor1tory reports which accompany tht data should show c1t least th~ following

(1) A list of the t~st equipment with when appli~able calibration dates

(2) Temperature data as diicuased in paragraph 2 b (2)

(3) Procedur~ information as discussed in paragraph 2b(3)

Chap 3 Page 26 Par 10

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 30: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

AC-20bull7t29 July 1971

~ bull -1

-I---I

I

REAR

I )(9

z 140bull-- Ebull--shy

RIGHT

ii z

I

9

POSITION LIGHTS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE

Figure 31

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 27

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 31: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

ABOVE HORIZONTAL

BELOW HORIZONTAL

29 July 1971 AC 20bull 74

-

HORIZONTAL PLANE

POSITION LIGHTS MINUMUM INTENSITIES IN VERTICAL PLANES

Figure 32

Chap 3 Page 28 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 32: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

ANTICOWSION LIGBlS MINIMUM INTENSITY IN VERTICAL PLANE

Figure 33 Date of T C Application Prior to 81171 On or after 81171

I 100 400

Chap 3 Par JO Page 29

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 33: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

AC 2074 29 July 1971

1 i 1 middot I Jllj 11j 1p 11 1middotj pbull I 111j iii i Hj ui 1jl 1middotbull 1 -1 JIW lJ 15 ~ abullmiddot ~ 1 it fH iu u1 middot j 1 bullbull middot ~ I bull ~r t 1 t ~l h ~middot ~ bullbullbull uU bullbullbull

m t~ 1 iF im Ii ijl n middot ~ ~~ orl ~~ l rn i~i ili Iii il 1m 1m 1111 g ~ 1m ii~ 1rn irn rJ 1 i=g gg rff im mi 1m gg gg im ~m ri i ri i~ m iil HH ili i ig 1 rii rm mi rni bullbullbullbull l =bull middotmiddotImiddot 1 I HF ii bullbullbull i-1bullbull Hjl 111 ti jII 11 1bullmiddot =iii j111 111 i 1 -middot bull 1 ii r bullbullbullbull bull bullbullbullbull bullbull 111 tt bull bull bullbullbullbullbull

1 rn I w~~) 111 1 rn im mi 1 Hi mi m irn m 111 i irn r i 11 mi 1~ ii mi ~tt lli ) i(

1 i1 middot~~ middotmiddotmiddot ~1 1 =Jg~ i~g 1~ middot j fH~ ~~t ~1P Hr 11 ~~ nn g 11n Bii nt _ middot H middotn i_ r ~ gi ~ ~ ~t i~_middot bullbull ~middot~ middot middot~bullbull _middot 1bullbull imiddot middotmiddot bullbull middot middot bull1 J middot1 middot middotmiddot 1f~1 bull t I n I r1 I I I1 1middot middot 1 i 1 i middot~ h 1bull ll 1 IImiddot iP l ni middot middot l Hi i middoti 4=lt middot1rmiddot i 1 I i i 111

1 111 I m 1H liH w Mi i n i 11 bull ~== i middot1middoti1 11m middot i=== ii 1 bullbullbullbull ll bullbull bullbullbull bull bull i bullbullbull bull I bull bull 11 t t tbull bull 1f~ bullbull bullbull bull ~ bull ~it-t bullbull bull bull 1 bullbull bull bull bullbullbullIIbullbull ~ tjT bull ]middot bullbullbullbull ff bullbullbull tbull1 1 11 l bullbull1bull bull I bull bull bullbullJ middot i H il Iii Jr i1 Hi illl I I I HH u 1 ii l11 1 =gt iW H 1 l iiil Uil i 1m 1middot middot f i ff Jj 1bull lj i i) Ii rjj li iJjii It tI bulljll Iii ji jlbull i bull 1I j Ji q jj- bullbullbullbull bull bullmiddotbull bullbullbullbull middotmiddot bullbullbullbull 1 tibullbullbullbullbullmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddotbull middotbullbullbull bull t IJ bulln l bull middot Ii J bull Ut t U n ~ j lJ bull I 1 ii I I middot111 lI II bullbull bull bull bull I bull I I ~ middot1middotmiddot I I middotbullbull= i 1 i 11i 11 H II i iii I ii I i i i1 i I H lld ri bull H i ii tl 1 111 bull bull middot bullmiddot iii a middot imiddot11 m I 1 l I H bull 1middot111rn middot - middot111 nbull middot11 bullmiddotbull 1bullmiddot bull iill i li 1 lli J j i ii 11 i I It l 11 l I )ii j1 jl I 1it bullii~

bull1 1i1 middot ~ middot bull t 111middot 1middot middot 1 i 1 middoti bull bullbull middotbull bull bull tmiddotmiddotmiddot middotbull 1 I II middot 11hmiddot middotbullmiddotmiddot ubull II middotbullIf ii I 1 middot 1 middota I 1 II1 i dil i I 1 i i i 1t i middot 11 middot i middot t bull111 1 ri= 11bull 111 111 middot1111 l ijmiddot1 11

1 1i middot1 Ii p bullbull111 middot middotmiddotmiddotrmiddotJ 11middot 1middot-=bullbull bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddot_bull middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1 ~~ s i 11 middot middot ~ 1middot middot bull t u middot bull middotmiddotmiddot bull ui1 bullbull middot middot bull 1 1middot 1 11 ~ middot +rHH-finrlit+Jn~+rimiddot-1microf1~Hfffims-f~~~~-~ 1 1ii J middot 1m 1 liii hi Hi iii W i i h ii1 1lt I111 ii ii Hll I 1 1 fg it Hf m JJ

ni1rn 11 middot middot 111 =iii 1 ii 1ii 1ii = m ii Jil 1m li 1H in ll 1 ill iill H11 I ill =i +m ti m mi middot middotffmiddotbullmiddot middot 1111 Iimiddot I middota I q middotbullt middot 11 middotr ti t middot middot i 1 11 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 bull t 11 middot I middot I i1 n ~ middot Hf bullj i =bull l ii iI 11 li l Ii I 1middot bull i bullbull 11 1r middotn u r middot middotbullbull t4 bull amp~ t bullbullbullbull bull 1 middotbullbull 1 I bull ti ti bull t 1 = bull it 1middot - ~

ni ii- mm1 mt m gg ii gg irn rn ii Ii~ i1i 11 fH i i 11 1 1 11 1li tl mmffl middotii= 11 mt= m1 irn i ii ill Hi illllil ii irn mi m1 lliP l 1 1l Ii t iii l 1 ljl 11 ilH im ~ 1m~ ti~ tisect H lit fi ti tr il rn 1 im = mJ tlti mi iiH 11 lil m m ~- tm 1 H rrn 1m m 1bull1 iu 1

p rn1 11 zibull 1

bull t1 middot1 ji11 Hbull l bull tHi =ii imiddoti tu ntmiddot

E

i1 bull ~ Utt I 1middot i bull tt 1 bull1t t H 1 middot11 I

111 im imiddot ii i1i ill rn = mmiddotiii i111 nn n 1 L 1 middot 11 I 11 1 i iI l m iiH D lili rnr 11 u1t1 I 1 rn rn i 111 li Ji ill i u 1 ff g1 P middot i 1middotmiddot 1 1 rn middotI ir~ ill 11~ mt ifJ 1=

n t nw nil li iJ i 11 i I B middot i I j bull ti middot ~middot wmiddot Jt Fpound ~

Plri ill - l1]lt middott middot1 Ill ti g~i ~fusect~ 1 11 11 11 11 u middot 1 1 middot1 I bull 1 t m r= rn t m

111 middot mmiddotmiddot middot u l 11 i middot1 1 1 I ti1bull bull iJ bull r ff 1ni l it ti~ m1

il 1 1U t dt j Fl i f fH lili EE n m1111t n 1 1m f1

ji1 mr mt Ii i iii l u 1 ~ 1ifo t 1tg il iii HH 1i illi n mi m H n rn 1 middot inl iii

irn im it mi if m1 wi u~ i i ~ ii mu mi Itbull1 I ~ Ht ti1 llh tit

tplusmn ~ iP 1m I 1111 [il nii u ltr -~rt~ ~ t bull 1tl i

1204 100bull 80 -w 40bull 20 0- 20bull 40

TYPICAL HORIZONTAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT FIGURE 34

Chap 3 Page 30 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 34: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

=== middot1= middotmiddot middot

-

middot ~ ~middot middot~

middot~

-middot

--

middot _ middot

middotI

~E- =t ) t= gt 1 middot middot middot middot+-~+--+-+-~+--+-----1i~1=1-+---1--- middotmiddot middot -~~-shy middot middotl

middot middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot-shy middot i middot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot middot middot middotimiddot middot middot l ~ I f 011 ~middot bull l I

--middot -tmiddot -+middot middot--middot-middot i - __j__ --~ 1 --- bull middot+middotmiddot middot i +middotmiddot I - i l i I i i t LI i I I i

_bullbull4-+-l-i-frac14-+-+--+--+-+-+--+~-11--+bull_t--1---middot-+-- -middotmiddot-rmiddotmiddot-i -middotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotshy middot I I - bull bull 1middot +middot _ middotj middotmiddotmiddotT middot-middot middot middotmiddotrmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddoti middot middotmiddot middotl middot middot 1 i middot middot 1 1

- -~--_ -shy middot~ +--+--+-rshy --middot- r middot-middot-middotmiddot __t ) __J_I_ j J ~ I j~ i

I I I

middot P ~liNl ~ ~ middot- ~ l i ~ I - I

bull -~bull middot I bull middotshy ---r bull-middotmiddot I middotbull 1 bull middot 1middot bull bullmiddot middotl middot middot middotbull middot middot - -tmiddot- -middoti_ middot--middotmiddotbull~middot-middotmiddotmiddot _ _[ i - middotmiddot_ -fmiddot -middot

( = I 1- -shy --tmiddot rmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot -middotmiddot1middot ---middot middot--middot middot1middot middot 1middotmiddot --middot bull

middot ~ _) i i I I middot middot _+ -----shy ~ -middot ~middottmiddot fmiddot middot li 1 i 1 j middot middot middotmiddot middotmiddot1middotmiddot middotmiddot _ -

1bull Imiddot f -~

bull bull bull Ibullbullbull bullbull bull bull Ibull bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1 middotmiddotmiddotmiddot _middot middot- -_ middotmiddot-t--- ~i1middot ~ bullmiddot middot-to-middot middott middotmiddotmiddot~~ middot-middotgt-middotI~middot middot-middot~middot 1 i middot middot ~-middot E f ~if= ~=middot middotmi==middotmiddotmiddot Jmiddot 1 1 middot bull bullbull middotbullbull bullbullbull bull bull bull bullbullbull bull -bull middotmiddotmiddot 1middotmiddotmiddotbullbullmiddot middotmiddot-- shy ~middotmiddot-__I ~f-- deg7shy --middot-~middot-- ___r~-shy ____~i ~ middot middot middot I middot f middotmiddot

iii ii -shy i middot middot bull (( 1 [ i l I j middot mrg t r 1 1 middot middot--1--_----shy

~shy I [ I I

--~--shy __ 1 middot+ +- L-~-f__middot l L____ i- f ~ t i ~ i ~ I I L i I i

~-shy ~~__ --shy middot- -middot r-shy --r ----~-[ --middot-middot-middotmiddot----T--------imiddotmiddotmiddot --middotmiddotshyI bull

--T ~-+shy f-shy

i ___ ----middotmiddot-~middot-middot----~shy

bull t t I bull

middot--shy middotmiddot middot middot middotmiddotmiddot middot 1 middotmiddot 1 middot I ) I

middot I

-imiddot ---middot------1--1--_- bull ---middot+middotmiddotmiddotmiddot-shy shy middotshy

middot1

t I middot middotmiddot bull -+middot--+-~_-1_---ishy- +-+-+t-1middotmiddot ~shy middot bull -

~ bull bull bull ~ bull 7 I middot I

middotmiddot--middot--+-~--~+--+-1--t--+-++-----+-~middotgt-middot-+middot+-~-~--+-shy--__middot-=--=middot -+--rtt+~middot~t-middot middott middot-middotmiddot ~bullmiddot middot

middot_middotmiddot+-middot-+----1middot________-------middot-middot---+middott_--______----+--rshy middotmiddot-- --middotmiddotmiddot ((=( _ _I bull - _Ji middotr ( middot middot i

)[ middot1bullmiddotmiddotd I ~ middot~ middot gt1 middot~ -~=+i-----1-shy~~ ~ Amiddotmiddotmiddot I i

middot middot I tI middot middot ~ middot- ~-~-shy ---middot middotmiddot_middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot Y~toL

middotmiddoti middotI middott T _I middot 1middot i _ i 1

--shy 1-- ~ bull I middot middot t I I -shy middot l middot middot+- middot middot Imiddot +middot +--t-middot~middot__middot1_ - --=-middot middot -J_-T-middot-

80 60 40 20 O - 20bull bull 40bull bull 60 -80 TYPICAL VERTICAL INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION- POSITION LIGHT

FIGURE 35

Chap 3 Par 10 Page 31

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 35: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

200

29 July 1971AC 20 middot74 ROTATING BEACON

EFFECTIVE INTENSITY DISTRIBUTION

280 VOLTS I bull 67 AMPERES 50RPM AVIATION RED LENS

17S

150

125

75

) )

C If

I

l ~

I 81 )

I I MINIMUM

INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS

I

V

j I I

I middot

Fl GU RE 36

so

25

0 -100 +100 +200 +300-300

DEGREES VERTICAL ltlt 3Chap 3

Page 32 Par 10

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 36: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

EXAMPLES OF TYPICAL TIME-INTENSITY CURVES SHOWING EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONS SECONDS PER INCH= 0666 CANDELAS PER INCH= 200

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT -5deg ELEYAJIQN ( 8 gt

=

TO ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION

i ~- -middotmiddotmiddot

I1200

1000

800

c( m_600C z c( u

400

200

__)

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N

I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I

173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS

ESTIMATE LINE Is

173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~

CLOSE ENOUGH

CONSIDERATIOt

__j~V bull-middot- -middot-

1056-- ---- ---

gtn ~ r i-middot

0703 SECt1 frac12 I

THIS CURVE TAKEN AT 00 ELEVATION (A) 1200

1000

800

600

400

200

_ t

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 ANDt2= 290SO IN t2 - t1 =1109 IN

I I2 90 X 200 X bull 0666 141I

(1109X 0666)+2

I l 141 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR)= 158 CANDELAS

I 1I

--1109 11 -

---1 10666 SEC I

0739 SEC t2bull

5 C

~

w

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 37: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

AC 20-74 29 July 1971

I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATION

T I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER IN

BAS eM bull bullI (t2 - t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN

I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I

2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I

AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2165 IN

I I I460 Xt0666 X 20 I 178 CANDELAS (2165 X 0666) +2 i

lP ESTIMATEfsl I I SEC ~ER IN = middot16 AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1c ANO l2C = 713 SQ IN

I I

DISTANCE FROM t1c TO 12lt=-t-= 4765 IN I

460 X 0666 X 20 = 184 CANDELAS

(4765 X 0666) +2 I I I

184 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTORl= 206 CANDE~S 80

I I f~ THIS CURVE TAKEN AT

I -2rf ELEVATION (c) VI

ltrd

i-60C z

ltu

) 40

) 20

_

v2165 t 1c t1b lzb ~Lt 4765 I

74011 tia

I FIGURE 38 I I

Chap 3 Page 34 Par 10

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 38: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July 1971 AC 20-74

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Input Voltage - 140 Flash Capacitor 177 MFD Charge Voltage - 420 V 156 Watt-Seconds Flash Rate - l per second

o0Vertical Angle shy

Teat Distance - SO ft Bn = Single flash reading x o2 x 5 (Multiplier= 125)

Horizontal Distribution Data

HOR METER NO OF FLASHES AVG READING READING INTEGRATED FOR SINGLE FIASH~ ill

00 198 10 198 2480 10deg 220 10 220 2750 20deg 220 10 220 2750 30deg 198 10 198 24smiddoto 400 204 10 204 2550 scf 171 10 l 70 2120 60deg 137 10 137 1710 10deg 110 10 110 1370 80deg 110 10 110 1370 900 115 10 115 1440

100deg 12 1 10 120 15CO 1100 115 10 l15 1440 120deg 110 10 110 137 0 13ltgtdeg 88 10 88 1100

TYPICAL FLASHTUBE MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET

Fiere 39

Chap 3 Page 35(and 36)Par 10

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 39: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

l 29 July 1971 AC 20-74

AppenJix

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

1 CANDELA - Unit of intensity Produces one lumen per unit solid angle (steradian) At a distance of one foot one candela produces an illuminance of one footcandle

2 CIIROMATICITY - The color quality of light determined by its chromaticity coordinates

3 COLORIMETRY - A method for measuring colors and specifying them in numerical or definite symbolic terms

4 COLOR TEMPERAnJRE - The temperature at which a blackbody must be operated to give the same color as the source usually expressed in Kelvins (K) bull

5 DOMINANT WAVELENGTH - That wavelength of spectrum light which when combined with neutral light in suitable proportionsmatches the color Neutral light is light for which the cbromaticity coordinates are x bull 333 aud y bull 333

6 EXPOSURE - The product of the illumiDance and the time during which the material is exposed to this illuminanceor E bullitThe unit of measure is the footcandle-second which represents an exposure of l second to a source having a light intensity of 1 candela at a distance of l foot

7 - The attribute of color determined primarily by the wavelength middot of light entering the eye

8 ILLUMINANCE - The areal density of luminous flux incident on a surface iD lumene per unit area or footcandles

9 INTENSITf - Flux per unit solid angle from a point source measured in lumena per ateradian or in candelas often called candlepower

10 1Q - Radiant energy that produces visual sensations

11 LUMEN - Unit of luminous (visible) flux Luminous energy emitted ~econd by a uniform point source of one candela intensity through a solid angle of one steradian

12 UJMINAHCE - Luminous intensity of a surface iD a given direction per unit of projected area of the surface as viewed from that direction measured in candelas per unit area

page 1 Par 1

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 40: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

29 July L971AC 20-74 Appendix 1

13 LUMINOUS FLtJX - The ti-me rate of flow of light sometimes called light power

14 PHOTOMETER- An optical device that utilizes equations of brightness or flux to permit the measurement of a photometric quantity such as intensity illuminance or brightness

15 PUOTOMETilY - The measurement of visible radiation on the basis of its effect upon the eye under standard conditions Visual photometry involves the adjustment of two parts of the visual field in order to identify or to determine a minimal difference Photoelectric photometry involves the measurement of the flux incident on a receiver from a test and a standard source at known distances

16 SATURATION - The extent to which a chromatic color differs from grey of the same brightness measured on an arbitrary scale from 0 to 100 (where grey is 0) Also called purity

~

17 SPECTROPHOTOMETER - An instrument designed to measure themiddot spectral transmittance or reflectance of objects Used primarily for comparing at each wavelength the flux leaving the object with the flux incident upon it It usually has a built-in light source

18 SPECTRORADIOHETER - An instrument used to measure the spectral distribution of radiant energy

19 SPECTRAL LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY V(A) - Quotient of the luminous flux at middota given wavelength by the radiant flux at that wavelength normalized by dividing by the maximum value of that quotient formally called luminosity factor

20 STERADIAN - The unit solid angle That solid angle originating at the center of a sphere which subtends an area on the surface of that sphere equal to the square of its sphere radius A sphere contains 4ff steradians (see Figure 13)

Par 13Page 2

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 41: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

gUANTlTY SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Flux Rate cif Flow of Light ~

Point Source Uaht PowerIIntensity

Concentration of Intensity fro111 surface source

(brightneaa)

LLuminance

Surface Received Light lgtensity

EIlluminance

Distance Traveled DuringWavelength a Cycle

Two Dimension AngleswSolid Angle

Electrical Energy Rate

V (A) Eye Response to varying

wPo11er

Luminous Wavelengths (Table 11)Efficiency

UNIT-1u111en

Candela

footlambert

lambert

footcandle

meter

steradian

watt

EQllALENT

1 lumensteradian

(1) canddasttshy1 r2 __ _1 bullbull It 2

l lumencm2 2054 candelasin2

l lumentf12

R~tio of velocity=~ frequency of radiation

Total Solid Andes411

(Sphere)

jouleslS1t

y

~

lumens bull watts x bllU X VbullI

andelas bull fo-tandld x dlstlnc~ squared

hmiddotbulltcandles bull cardelas~Hatane squared

icttr bull 106 mlcromeurs (a) bull 109 nanomters (nm) bull 1010 ang~crolo (A~

steradiansbull surfacE arta dlstancE 11uarbull

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 42: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

AC 20 7429 July 1971 Appendix 3

APPENDIX 3

TRISTIMULUS COLORIM~TRY ANO AV IAThlN tll~IITS

Althou~h the energy distribution ot a colored 1i~ht may tmiddotxtend tlumiddotu~lhbull11t the visible spectrum the d1aratterisLics ot vision are suih thtt a combination of three primary colors can match the li~ht t tht satisiact in of the eye The apparent match of two colors of differ~nt spectral cont~nt is called metamerism and the two colors are called a 11metameric pair 11

This method of matching or rtproducing a color is the basis for tristimulus colorimetry The tristimulus methodis tu measure the energy distributin and then to convert thi11 information iut) the tristimulus values which form a metameric match Figure 14 of thii irular shows how to mix th~middot three CIE primary colors in order to match any w1ve Itmgth tf we have entergy distribution throughout the visiblt sp~middottnan we simply multiply the relafri ptwer amplitude at aach wavelength ti thl bullmiddotvrresponding tristimulus value i y and i for that wav~length Jlh11 by adding up all the measurements a total amount for each of the pr ima1middot i~- is found Mixing these amounts of X (red) Y (green) and Z (blue) wti acomplished a metameric match Thus

X bull i~ig Ex IiA

where E i~ the power and i is the proportion of red primary required for that wavelength Y and Z are found similarly

tn this way we can dttermine the required amounts of primaries to match the color of a source or in the case of lights the lamp CIE standard illuminant 0 A (incandescent) has a published power distribution as have several other sources and tables of Ex Ey and Ez are available If the source is non-standard the E values must be measured and by computation the tables developed The significance of this information is that the color of the light transmitted by the filter depends not only on the filter but also on the spectral distribution of the light incident on it

After tabled values for Ei etc are developed they must be modified by the filter effect Usually this is done by measuring the filters transmittances throughout the visible spectrum~ This gives a new colUIIIO labeled T Then to obtain the X Y and Z required to form a match of the overall system we must combine the data Combining the source and filter data we solve the equations

770 X bull t380 Ex TAA etc

Mechanically this is done as follows

1 Measure the power distribution of the light source E) in 10 nanometer steps from 380 to 770 nanometers (40 measurements)

Page 1

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 43: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

---

29 July 1971AC 10bull74 Appendix 3

2 For each step combine (by multiplication) i y and z information from tabled values to obtain Ex Ey and Ez (40 values)

3 Measure the transmittance (r) of the filter at these same 40 points C01UbJne these numbers wlth previously computed values to obtain 40 values tor Elt Eyt Ezt

4middot Add the 40 values for Ext to obtain X the amount of red primary required for a match Repeat for Eyt and Ezt to obtain Y and Z

5 Compute x bull X bull y bull Y and z bull Z This X+Y+Z X+Y+Z X+Y+Z

gives the d1romatkity tnonl inttPs which will form a metameric match of the light color

The transmittance of a light filter isby definition the ratio of transmitted to incident light power The transmittances (T) measured at the 40 sample points do not consider eye response nor the power distribution of the illuminant Therefore when we evaluate a filter for overall transmittancewe 11Jst combine the following data

L distribution of source bull E

2 ye response luminous-efficiency function bull bull bull y [y was adjusted to correspond to V(A))

3 Filter transmittance distribution t

These three variables were combined when developing Y as r~~g Ey A) As this is also a measurement of visible transmitted light magnitude dividing by the incident light will give the transmittance of the filter The incident light is the same as the transmitted ligh5 of we omit the filter transmittances Thereforethe incident light is t 3~0 Fy AA and the transmittance T bull bull middotr~ Ey T6A

r~i8 Ey A)

Page 2

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 44: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

C lU-1429 middotJuly 1971 Append1x 4

APJlloNfgtlX 4

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1 lision in Milllary Avfotion - wur Ttbullmiddothnica l Report 58-J99 ASTIA D1um~nt Nu AO 207780

2 lca11damental cf LighL JnJ Lightf111 - intnll tlectric Company Large liamplllp Otpartmerrt ClevcJaud Ohfu

3 a-~dertl Stat1dJrd No j with itlendllliCnL l March 21 1951 Superintendenr of Documents Washington D c 20402

Mil-C-25050A(ASG) December 2 ll63 - Colors Aeconautkal Lights and Lighting Equipment General Requirement$ For

5 Color and Transmi1sion Properties of Sharp Cut-Off Glass Filters it Elevated Temperatures - c E Leberknight and G E Stone Kopp Glass Inc Swissvale Penasylvania April 1955

6 Spec1Ucat1on for Photo111etrtc TeampL Procedure Specification CAA-110 June 10 1957 Department of Cpmmerce Civil Aeronautics Administration Office of the Air Navigation Facilities Plant Engineering Division Washington D C 20402

7 A Short Course in Photoiwtry Leu Leva Consulting Physicist New Yo~k N~w York ~lectronics Products F~bruary 1965

8 Collision Avoidanc~ and Aircraft Lighting Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Ohio 196S

9 Measurement of the tff~ccive Candlepow~r of Flashing Beacons - Charles A Steinberger anu Marshal F Rowland Grimes Manufacturing Co Urbana Obiu 965

10 Illuminating Engineering Society Lighting Handbook Fourth Edition

11 Iluminatinamp tngineering Society Guide for Calculating the Effective Intensity of Flashing Lights Illumination Engineering 59 747 (1964)

12 Photometry of Colored Lights - A c Wall Illuminating Engineering 1967

13 MIL-L-2S467C Lighting Integral Aircraft Instrument General Specification For (Dec1963)

14 Colors of Signal Lights NBS Monograph 7S (1967) Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

15 U s Standard for Colors of Signal Lights (1964)

Page 1

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971
Page 45: AC NO: DATE: ADVISORY CIRCULARAC 20- 74 . LIST OP ILLUfflATIONS . Ill!& The Visible Spectrum . Standard•Observer Lum1iaou1•Efficiency . Curve (C.I.E.) Intensity and Illumination

AC 20-74 29 July 1971 Appendx 4

16 1968 NlllDf Technical Publications Row to Measure Light - PB Lape and Igt V llyer International Light Inc Newburyport MaH

17 Illumination Engineeringbull Warren B Boast 1953

18 Colorimetry NBS MoftOgraph 104 1968 Superintendent of Documents Washington D C 20402

19 Light and Color Measurement of Sbullll Light Sources Bode Mede General Electric Sbullll Lamp Division Hela Park Hew York

20 The Measurement of the Color of Light Paitt~d by Signal Devices by Stewart Seaae and Paul M Fisher Rohm and Baas Color Laboratory Availablebullbull a reprint from Color Bnaiiletrina Reprint Dept 18 John Street Nev York Nev York 10038

21 lhe Application of a Color-Correction Factor in the Photometry of Colored Signal Lights by George K c Hardesty and T o Twiet Naval Ship Research and Development Laboratory Almapolia Maryland (Technical Rote ELECtAB 12Sl8 of May 1968)

22 Maxilaum Luminoua Efficiency Contour Chartbull for Colored Materials by George It c Hardesty a L Booker and J 1 Mctane Nav1 Ship leeearch and Develcpant Laboratory Almapolia Maryland 21402 (Technical Rote BLECLU 20068 of October 1968)

23 Photom1try w T Walsh Conatable Third lditlon 19S8

24 Thbull Role of Exterior Lights in MidbullAir Collielon Prevention lB Projector Applied P17cbology Corp July 1962 ASTIAmiddotDocument AD 602421

2S Computation of the Effective lntenaity of na1hlng Lights C A Douglaa Illumination Engineering Vol S2 page 641 December 1957

  • Structure Bookmarks
    • CIRCULAR
    • Service
    • I
    • t--1--~------uubullbullshyv10Ln
    • o 09 08 01 05 VIOLET BLUE GREEN YELLOWi I I I I r I 1 I I REO 03 02 Ot J I I V L shy0 380 420 460 500 540 580 620 660 700 740 WAVELENGTH OF RADIANT ENERGY IN NANOMETERS STANDARD-OBSERVER LUMINOUS EFFICIENCY CURVE ( C1E)
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • IH
    • u
    • middotUr
    • = shy
    • 800 600 en z w tshy400 ~ 200 - j ~ I -J -l J_ I INCH
    • Figure
    • Figure
    • REAR I )(9 z 140bull--Ebull--shyRIGHT ii z
    • ABOVE HORIZONTAL BELOW HORIZONTAL
    • Figure
    • ) ) C If I l~ I 81 ) I I MINIMUM INTENSITY REQUIREM~NTS I V j I I I middot Fl GU RE 36
    • ESTIMATE LINE IS CLOSE ENOUGH TO 141 FOR PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION i ~--middotmiddotmiddot I1200 1000 800 c( m_600C z c( u 400 200 __) AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1 AND l =350 SQ I N t2-t1 middot=l0561N I I 350 X 200 X 0666 I 173bull (1i6 X 0666)t 2 I 173 X 112 (HEAT CORRECTION FACTOR) 194 CANDELAS ESTIMATE LINE Is 173 FOR PRACTI CAL ~ CLOSE ENOUGH CONSIDERATIOt __j~V bull-middot--middot- 1056---------
    • --1109
    • I I I I I EXAMFU OF TYPICAL EFFECTIVE INTENSITY CALCULATIONT I I ED ON I AX AREA IN SQ IN X sec PER IN X CANDELAS PER INBAS eM bull bullI (t2 -t IN INCHES X SECONDS PER IN)+ 2I I Iill ESTIMATE gl SEC PER IN bull0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1a and~= 90 SQ bullbull IN DISTANCE FROM t1a TO t201= 704 IN I I 9middot00 )$ 0666 X 20 bull 179 CANDELAS (7 04 X 0666) +2 I2NO ESTIMATE (bl I SEC PER IN = bull 0666 I I AREA BETWEEN LIMITS t1b and titgtbull 460 SQ IN I I IDISTANCE FROM t1b TO tj = 2
      • AC 20-74 29 July 1971